17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.

book 0 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

California Proposition 65 Warning To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
WARNING: This product contains or emits vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
chemicals known to the state of California to cause have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive access to the vehicle or the EDR.
harm.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
Event Data Recorders
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
vehicle owner.
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
Service Diagnostic Recorders
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
designed to record such data as:
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
confidential.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened; California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
and/or brake pedal; and, vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
• How fast the vehicle was traveling. apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

00X31-T3W-6200 2017 Accord Hybrid (FHEV) AOM03792

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 1 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

A Few Words About Safety You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And ● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility. ● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and These signal words mean:
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
could hurt you or others. 3DANGER
you don't follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
3WARNING
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You you don't follow instructions.
must use your own good judgment.
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
3CAUTION
instructions.

● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.

● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please

read it carefully.
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 2 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the 2 Safe Driving P. 33
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. For Safe Driving P. 34 Seat Belts P. 38 Airbags P. 45

2 Instrument Panel P. 73
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
Indicators P. 74 Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 98
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model. 2 Controls P. 117
Clock P. 118 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 120
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * P. 140
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) Adjusting the Seats P. 160
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features. 2 Features P. 183
Audio System P. 184 Audio System Basic Operation P. 190, 213
Customized Features P. 295, 314 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 338
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
2 Driving P. 409
Before Driving P. 410 Towing a Trailer P. 415
The information and specifications included in this publication were Refueling P. 482 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 484
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications 2 Maintenance P. 485
Before Performing Maintenance P. 486 Maintenance MinderTM P. 489
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 514
obligation. Climate Control System Maintenance P. 527

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 535

If a Tire Goes Flat P. 536 Power System Won’t Start P. 545
Overheating P. 551 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 554

2 Information P. 563
Specifications P. 564 Identification Numbers P. 566
Emissions Testing P. 569 Warranty Coverages P. 571
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 3 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Contents
Quick Reference Guide P. 4
Child Safety P. 58 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 70 Safety Labels P. 71

Safe Driving P. 33

Instrument Panel P. 73
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 130 Security System P. 134 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 137
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 141 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 158
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 167 Climate Control System P. 179
Controls P. 117

Audio Error Messages P. 283 General Information on the Audio System P. 288 Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 340, 371
P. 183

Driving P. 409
When Driving P. 416 Braking P. 463 Parking Your Vehicle P. 475

Maintenance P. 485

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 493 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 506

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 516 12-Volt Battery P. 525 Remote Transmitter Care P. 526 Handling the Unexpected P. 535
Cleaning P. 528 Accessories and Modifications P. 533

Information P. 563
Jump Starting P. 548 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 550
Fuses P. 558 Emergency Towing P. 561

Index P. 575
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 567 Reporting Safety Defects P. 568
Authorized Manuals P. 573 Customer Service Information P. 574
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 4 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
❙ ECON Button (P 424)
Quick Reference Guide

❙ System Indicators (P 74)

❙ Gauges (P 98)
❙ Multi-Information Display (P 100)
❙ POWER Button (P 141)
❙ Audio/Information Screen
(P 191, 214)
❙ Audio System (P 190, 213)
❙ Navigation System *
() See Navigation System Manual
❙ Audio Information Touch Screen *
(P 216)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack * (P 186)
❙ Climate Control System (P 179)
❙ Rear Window Defogger (P 154)
❙ Heated Mirror Button (P 154)
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Center Pocket (P 170)
❙ Front Seat Heater Switches * (P 177)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 455)
❙ Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System Button * (P 426)
❙ Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button (P 467)
❙ Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button (P 443)
❙ Parking Sensor System Button * (P 476)
4
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 5 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 144)

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Fog Lights (P 146)
❙ LaneWatchTM(P 456)
❙ (Display) Button (P 191, 214, 216)
❙ Horn (Press an area around .)
❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P 153)
❙ Brightness Control (P 153)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P 151)
❙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons
(P 429)
❙ Interval Button (P 437)
❙ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button
(P 447)

❙ (Information) Buttons (P 100)

❙ SEL/RESET Button (P 101)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 157)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
(P 233), () See Navigation System Manual
❙ MENU Button * (P 188) ❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
❙ SOURCE Button (P 188) Voice Control Buttons (P 340, 371)
❙ (+ / (- / / Buttons (P 188)

* Not available on all models 5

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 6 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Visual Index
❙ Power Window Switches (P 137)
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 128)

❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 159)

❙ Rearview Mirror (P 158)

❙ Interior Fuse Box (P 559)
❙ Driver's Front Airbag (P 48)
❙ Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 48)

❙ Parking Brake (P 463)

❙ Trunk Main Switch (P 132)
❙ Glove Box (P 169)
❙ USB Port (P 185)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
(P 172)
❙ Wireless Charger * (P 173)
❙ EV Button (P 13)
❙ Transmission Shift Lever
(P 422)
❙ SPORT Button (P 425)
❙ Hood Release Handle (P 494)
❙ Trunk Release (P 130)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 483)
6
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 7 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 54)

❙ Ceiling Light (P 167)

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Grab Handle
❙ Coat Hook (P 175)
❙ Seat Belts (P 38)
❙ Map Lights (P 168)
❙ Moonroof Switch *
(P 140)
❙ Sunglasses Holder
(P 176)

❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors

❙ Side Airbags (P 52)

❙ Front Seat (P 160)

❙ Accessory Power
Socket (P 172)
❙ USB Port * (P 185)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 65)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 67)
❙ Rear Seat
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 63)
* Not available on all models 7
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 8 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 493)

❙ Windshield Wipers (P 151, 514)

❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 159)

❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 122)

❙ Headlights (P 144, 506)

❙ Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights (P 144, 510)
❙ Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P 144, 150, 510)

❙ Tires (P 516, 536)

❙ Fog Lights (P 146, 508)

8
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 9 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Quick Reference Guide

❙ How to Refuel (P 483)

❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P 513)

❙ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 130)

❙ Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 133)

❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P 480)

❙ Trunk Release Button (P 131)

❙ Back-Up Lights (P 512)

❙ Taillights (P 512)

❙ Brake/Taillights (P 511)
❙ Rear Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights (P 511)

9
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 10 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi Mode

Drive)
Quick Reference Guide

Your SPORT HYBRID i-MMD vehicle uses both an electric motor and a gasoline engine as propulsion sources, with the electric motor
receiving electricity from an internal High Voltage battery or internal generator. The High Voltage battery can be charged from the
generator driven by the engine or regenerative braking.

When driving, your vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric motor, exclusively by the gasoline engine, or by a combination of the two.
The system selects which propulsion source is most appropriate and automatically switches to it. Under certain circumstances, pressing the
EV button can manually enable EV (driven only on electricity) mode.

● Energy efficiency
As with a gasoline-powered vehicle, hybrid vehicle fuel efficiency and driving range is most impacted by your driving style. Aggressive
acceleration and high-speed driving can easily trigger the system to switch the propulsion source to the gasoline-powered engine.
In addition, heavy climate control system use negatively affects vehicle range and efficiency. Either of these use patterns will more quickly
reduce the High Voltage battery's state of charge.

● Battery types
There are two types of batteries used in this vehicle; a standard 12-volt battery that powers the airbags, the interior and exterior lights, and
other standard 12-volt systems; and a high voltage battery that is used to power the propulsion motor and recharge the 12-volt battery.

10
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 11 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD SYSTEM MAIN COMPONENTS

Gasoline Engine– Provides propulsion to drive the wheels
under certain driving conditions, and turns the generator.

Quick Reference Guide

Generator– Starts the engine and generates electric power
when driven by the gasoline engine to supply electricity to
power the electric motor and/or to charge the High Voltage
battery.

Electric Motor– Provides propulsion to drive the wheels in

conjunction with the gasoline engine in certain conditions, and
provides electricity to the High Voltage battery through
regenerative braking. High
Voltage
High Voltage Battery– Provides electrical storage and serves Battery
as a power source for the electric motor.
Learning about the High Voltage battery’s characteristics will
help you get the best handling and maximize the range of your Generator & Electric Motor
electric vehicle. (P462) Gasoline Engine

High Voltage Battery Charge Level Indicator– Displays

battery state of charge.
When the indicator:
• Displays two or less segments, EV mode is no longer available.
• Displays eight segments, battery charge level is full.

11
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 12 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Vehicle
Speed
Quick Reference Guide

Time

Operating
Electric Vehicle (EV) Hybrid (HV) Engine (Direct Drive) Regeneration
mode
Stopped or driven at low speeds: Driven in high-load conditions Driven in high-speed, low-load Decelerating, without
● Only the electric motor (e.g., when accelerating, going conditions: accelerator being depressed.
provides propulsion to the uphill): ● The gasoline engine provides ● The electric motor provides

wheels. ● The Electric Motor provides propulsion to the wheels. electricity to the High Voltage
propulsion to the wheels. ● The High Voltage battery battery through regenerative
Vehicle ● The gasoline engine drives the supplies electricity to the braking.
Speed generator, supplying electric motor for added
electricity to the electric propulsion.
motor for added propulsion ● The electric motor provides

or to the High Voltage battery electricity to the High Voltage

for charging. battery through regenerative
braking.

Power Flow
Monitor

Electric Motor Stopped/Running Running Generating/Running Regenerating

Generator Stopped Generating No Output Stopped/No Output

Gasoline
Stopped Running Running Stopped/No Output
Engine

Battery Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging

12
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 13 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

EV Button
EV mode is enabled by pressing the EV button near the shift lever.

Quick Reference Guide

The EV mode indicator comes on in the instrument panel when EV
mode is enabled.

Press the EV button again to switch back to HV mode. Press

Some conditions, such as a low High Voltage battery level and a

high vehicle speed, may keep the system from manually switching
into EV mode. The beeper sounds and a message appears on the
multi-information display with the button pressed when EV mode is
disabled.

Shifts in vehicle, driving or road conditions may automatically

cancel EV mode and switch back to HV mode.

A message will appear on the multi-information display and EV mode may be canceled automatically when:
● The High Voltage battery charge level is low.
● Your vehicle speed is too high.
● Your vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h) while the engine is in warming-up operation.
● You fully depress the accelerator pedal.
● You are driving on hilly road.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages (P88)

Canadian models
In EV mode, the acoustic vehicle alerting system is on.
2 Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (P426)

13
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 14 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

● Regenerative Energy and Regenerative Braking

When regenerative braking is in When decelerating without the accelerator being depressed or the brake pedal being applied, or
operation while driving downhill, the electric motor acts as a generator that recovers a portion of the
electrical energy that was used to accelerate the vehicle. This regenerative braking slows the
Quick Reference Guide

Motor vehicle in a manner similar to engine braking in a gasoline-powered vehicle. This function is
enhanced when the shift lever is moved to B .

High
Voltage
Battery

● Auto Engine Stop/Start

Your vehicle's gasoline engine automatically stops running during vehicle operation or restarts while the vehicle is stationary when it is
appropriate.
In the following cases, however, auto engine stop may not activate.
• The vehicle momentarily needs additional power for aggressive acceleration, or driving uphill or at high speed.
• The climate control system is in heavy use.
• The High Voltage battery temperature is high or low.

● Sounds Unique to the SPORT HYBRID i-MMD System

When you first start driving this vehicle, you likely will hear some unfamiliar sounds, particularly when you first turn on the power system,
while driving, and just after parking. Some of these sounds are unique to this vehicle‘s powertrain, fuel, and climate control systems; others
are similar to sounds generated by conventional automobiles that typically are masked by louder noises absent from a vehicle of this design.
These sounds are not a cause for concern, and you will soon recognize them as normal and thus be able to detect any new or unusual noise
should one develop.

14
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 15 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Safety Precautions
Do not touch the High Voltage system
Attempting to take a High Voltage system component apart or disconnect one of its wires
can cause severe electrical shock. If the High Voltage system needs maintenance or repair, it

Quick Reference Guide

should be performed at a dealer.

If a crash occurs
●Be careful of electric shock hazard.
uIf a severe crash damages your vehicle’s High Voltage system, there is a possibility of
electrical shock due to exposed High Voltage components or wires. If this happens, do not
touch any of the High Voltage system components or any of its orange wires.
●Avoid contact with High Voltage battery fluid.
Do not cover the air intake. uThe High Voltage battery contains a flammable electrolyte that could leak as a result of
a severe crash. Avoid any skin or eye contact with the electrolyte as it is corrosive. If you
accidentally touch it, flush your eyes or skin with a large quantity of water for at least five
minutes, and seek medical attention immediately.
●Use a fire extinguisher for an electrical fire.
uAttempting to extinguish an electrical fire with a small quantity of water, from a garden
hose for instance, can be dangerous.
●Anytime the vehicle is damaged in an accident, have it repaired by a dealer.
Air Intake

Emergency Shutdown System for the High Voltage System

The emergency shutdown system may activate when the vehicle is impacted by some
If the air intake is obstructed incident such as a crash. When this system activates, the High Voltage system automatically
during vehicle operation, the High shuts down, and your vehicle no longer will move under its own power. To return the High
Voltage battery can become too Voltage system back to normal operation, consult a dealer.
hot. To protect the battery, the
system may start to limit the
Honda collects and recycles High Voltage batteries used in its vehicles – consult a dealer for
battery’s output and cause the
more information.
power system and 12-volt battery
charging system indicators to come
on.

15
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 16 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Eco Assist® System (P 424)

Ambient Meter Ambient Meter

Quick Reference Guide

● Changes color to reflect your driving

style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Blue green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
Blue: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.

The message is displayed for a few seconds

ECON Button (P 424) when the ECON button is pressed.
Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 83)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.

16
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 17 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Quick Reference Guide

Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
● Comes on when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Drive
Cycle
Score

Lifetime Points

Eco Drive Display (P105)

● Keep the vehicle icon near the center of the circle.

Fuel economy is: Worse Better Best Better Worse

Aggressive Moderate Slow Moderate Aggressive

Deceleration Deceleration Acceleration/ Acceleration Acceleration
Deceleration

17
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 18 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Safe Driving (P 33)

Quick Reference Guide

Airbags (P 45)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 58)

● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 70)

● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P 38)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Before Driving Checklist (P 37)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.

18
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 19 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Instrument Panel (P 73)

Gauges (P 98)/Multi-Information Display (P 100)/System Indicators (P 74)

Quick Reference Guide

Speedometer
System Indicators
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Malfunction Indicator (Green/Amber) Indicator (Green/Amber)
Indicator Lamp
Security System High Voltage Battery
Low Oil Pressure System Indicators
Indicator Alarm Indicator Charge Level Gauge
12-Volt Battery Turn Signal and
Charging System Hazard Warning
Indicator Indicators
Vehicle Stability Anti-lock Brake
Assist (VSA®) System System (ABS)
Indicator Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
U.S. Parking Brake
and Brake System
Immobilizer System Indicator (Red)
Indicator Canada
Smart Entry System
Indicator POWER/CHARGE Multi-Information Display Fuel Gauge
U.S. Brake System
Electric Power Gauge Indicator (Amber)
Steering (EPS) System Shift Lever Position
Indicator Canada
Indicator
System Message Low Fuel Indicator
Indicator System Indicators Lights Indicators
Seat Belt Reminder
ECON mode Low Tire Pressure/ Indicator
Indicator TPMS Indicator Lights On Indicator
Supplemental
READY Indicator Road Departure Mitigation High Beam Indicator Restraint System
(RDM) Indicator Indicator
POWER SYSTEM
Indicator Fog Light Indicator EV Indicator
Collision Mitigation
SPORT Mode Braking SystemTM Auto High-Beam EV Mode Indicator
Indicator (CMBSTM) Indicator Indicator (Green) *

* Not available on all models 19

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 20 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Controls (P 117)

Clock (P 118) Models with one display

POWER Button (P 141)
Quick Reference Guide

Press the button to change the vehicle’s

Models with navigation system power mode.
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.

Models with two displays

a Enter the Clock Adjustment screen.

2 Adjusting the Clock (P 118)

b Rotate to change hour, then press

.

c Rotate to change minute, then

press .

a Select , then select Settings.

b Select Clock/Info, then Clock

Adjustment.

c Adjust the hours and minutes by

selecting 3 / 4 .

d Select OK to set the time.

20
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 21 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Turn Signals (P 144) Wipers and Washers Steering Wheel (P 157)

(P 151) ● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
Turn Signal Control Lever towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.

Quick Reference Guide

Right
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
(- : Low Sensitivity*1
(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2

(+ : High Sensitivity*1
(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2

Left

Lights (P 144) Unlocking the Front

Light Control Switches Pull toward Doors from the Inside
you to spray (P 126)
washer fluid.
High Beam ● Pull either front door inner handle to
MIST unlock and open it at the same time.
Low Beam OFF
AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically
INT*2: Low speed with intermittent
Flashing LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe

*1:Vehicle with auto wiper

*2:Vehicle without auto wiper
● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors.

21
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 22 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Trunk (P 130) Power Door Mirrors Power Windows (P 137)

● With the power mode in ON, open and
(P 159)
close the power windows.
● With the power mode in ON, move the ● If the power window lock button is in the
Quick Reference Guide

selector switch to L or R.
off position, each passenger's window
● Push the appropriate edge of the
can be opened and closed with its own
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror. switch.
Selector Switch ● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
Trunk Release passenger's window switch is disabled.

● To unlock and open the trunk: Power Window Lock Button Indicator
• Pull the trunk release.
• Press the trunk release button on the remote
transmitter or the smart entry remote. Adjustment Switch
• Press the trunk release button on the Window
trunk lid. Switch

22
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 23 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Climate Control System (P 179)

● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Quick Reference Guide

Models with navigation system
The climate control system is voice operable. (P 233)

AUTO Button (Windshield Defroster) Button

Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Buttons

Temperature Control
Buttons

(On/Off) Button

SYNC (Synchronized) Button

MODE Control Button (Recirculation) Button

/ (Fan Control) Buttons A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Air flows from dashboard vents and

back of the center console.
Air flows from floor and dashboard
vents, and back of the center console.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and windshield
defroster vents.

23
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 24 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Features (P 183)

Audio Remote Controls ● / Button

Quick Reference Guide

Radio:Press to change the preset station.

(P 188) Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
(+ / (- / / Button
CD/USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.

SOURCE
Button

● (+ / (- Button
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
Models with one display
FMAMCDUSBiPod
Bluetooth® AudioPandora® *AUX
Models with two displays
FMAMSiriusXM® *CDUSBiPod
Pandora® *Bluetooth® AudioAudio
Apps

24
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 25 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Audio System (P 190, 213)

Models with one display (P 190)

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen

CD Button CD Slot
AUX Button
FM/AM Button
PHONE Button
(Day/Night) Button
(CD Eject) Button

DISP Button SETTINGS Button

(Skip/Seek) Button (Skip/Seek) Button

VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob MENU Button
Selector Knob
BACK Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)

* Not available on all models 25

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 26 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Models with two displays (P213)

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen

*
MAP
(CD Eject) Button

(Day/Night) Button
(Power) Button

(HOME) Icon

VOL (Volume)
Icons

(MENU) Icon

(BACK) Icon

App List
Audio/Information Touch Screen

26
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 27 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Driving (P 409)

Transmission (P 422)

Quick Reference Guide

● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when turning on the power.
● Shifting
Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of (P .

Press the release button to move READY Indicator

the shift lever. On: You can start to drive.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.

Shift Lever
Park
Used when parking or turning the power on or off.

Reverse
Used when reversing.

Neutral
Propulsion power is not transmitted to wheels.
Release Button

Drive
Used for normal driving.

Drive (B)
● Used when driving down a long hill.
● Used to increase regenerative braking.

* Not available on all models 27

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 28 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Vehicle Stability Assist Refueling (P 482)

(VSA®) (P 454) Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87
● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system or higher
Quick Reference Guide

helps stabilize the vehicle during Fuel tank capacity: 14.8 US gal (56 L)
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces. a Push the fuel fill
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold door release
the button until you hear a beep. handle.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you turn on the power system.

Collision Mitigation b Turn the fuel fill

Braking SystemTM cap slowly to
remove the cap.
(CMBSTM) OFF Button
(P 467)
● When a possible collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to c Place the cap in
reduce the vehicle speed and the severity the holder on the
of the collision. fuel fill door.
● To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and
hold the button until you hear a beep.

Tire Pressure Monitoring d After refueling,

screw the cap
System (TPMS) (P 458) back on until it
● Detects a change in tire conditions and clicks at least
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire once.
pressures.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you turn on the power system.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.

28
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 29 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Maintenance (P 485)

Under the Hood (P 493)

Quick Reference Guide

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, inverter coolant, and
windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Wiper Blades (P 514)
● Check brake fluid. ● Replace blades if they leave streaks
● Check the 12-volt battery condition monthly. across the windshield.

a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the

dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.

Tires (P 516) Lights (P 506)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly. ● Inspect all lights regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

29
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 30 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Handling the Unexpected (P 535)

Flat Tire (P 536) Power System Won't Overheating (P 551)

Quick Reference Guide

● Park in a safe location and repair the flat ● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
tire using the tire repair kit in the trunk.
Start (P 545) steam under the hood, open the hood,
● If the 12-volt battery is dead, jump start
and let the power system cool down.
using a booster battery.

Indicators Come On Blown Fuse (P 558) Emergency Towing

(P 554) ● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical (P 561)
device does not operate.
● Identify the indicator and consult the ● Call a professional towing service if you
owner's manual. need to tow your vehicle.

30
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 31 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

What to Do If
Canadian models The steering wheel may be locked.

Quick Reference Guide

●

The power mode does not ● Move the steering wheel left and right while
change from VEHICLE OFF pressing the POWER button at the same time.
(LOCK) to ACCESSORY.
Why?

The power mode does not The shift lever should be moved to (P .
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?

Why does the brake pedal This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
pulsate slightly when problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
applying the brakes? pump the brake pedal.

The rear door cannot be Check if the childproof lock is in

opened from inside the the lock position. If so, open the
vehicle. Why? rear door with the outside door
handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the unlock position.

31
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 32 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Why do the doors lock If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
after I unlocked the doors relocked automatically for security.
Quick Reference Guide

using a remote
transmitter?

Why does the beeper The beeper sounds when:

sound when I open the ● The power mode is in ACCESSORY.

driver's door? ● The exterior lights are left on.

Why does the beeper The beeper sounds when:

sound when I start driving? ● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.

● The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Why do I hear a screeching The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
sound when I apply the inspected by a dealer.
brake pedal?

32
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 33 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving Side Airbags ...................................... 52

Important Safety Precautions ............. 34 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 54
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 36 Airbag System Indicators.................... 55
Safety CheckList................................. 37 Airbag Care ....................................... 57
Seat Belts Child Safety
About Your Seat Belts........................ 38 Protecting Child Passengers ............... 58
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 41 Safety of Infants and Small Children .......60
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 44 Safety of Larger Children ................... 68
Airbags Exhaust Gas Hazard
Airbag System Components............... 45 Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 70
Types of Airbags ................................ 48 Safety Labels
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 48 Label Locations .................................. 71

33
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 34 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

For Safe Driving

The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions 1Important Safety Precautions

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
■ Always wear your seat belt of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to driver while driving.
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

■ Restrain all children

Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.

■ Be aware of airbag hazards

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.

■ Don't drink and drive

Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

34
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 35 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely

Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to

Safe Driving
divert some attention away from driving.

■ Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

35
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 36 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
9 8 9
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Safe Driving

Some features do not require any action on your part.

6 These include a strong steel framework that forms a
10
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
7 column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
8
belts in a sufficient crash.
10
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
11 in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
Safety Cage
7
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
6 Seat Belts
7 Front Airbags
8 Side Airbags
9 Side Curtain Airbags
10 Door Locks
11 Seat Belt Tensioners

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.

36
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 37 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety CheckList

Safety CheckList
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items 1Safety CheckList
each time before you drive. If the Door Open or Door And Trunk Open
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked. message appears on the multi-information display, a
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider door and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close

Safe Driving
all doors and the trunk tightly until the message
from unexpectedly opening a door.
disappears.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 126
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are Information Messages P. 88
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 160
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 163
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 41
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 58

37
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 38 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you 1About Your Seat Belts
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the 3 WARNING
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
Safe Driving

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases

belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full the chance of serious injury or death in a
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags. crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts Be sure you and your passengers always
- side impacts wear seat belts and wear them properly.
- rear impacts
- rollovers Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts risk of serious injury.
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping require you to wear seat belts.
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean
child seats. forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 65 the belt to extend fully without locking.

38
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 39 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Proper use of seat belts 1About Your Seat Belts

Follow these guidelines for proper use: If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the

Safe Driving
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

■ Seat Belt Reminder 1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the power mode is set to ON before the the power mode is set to ON.
driver's seat belt is fastened, the beeper will When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,
sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
does not fasten the belt before the beeper sound. The indicator also may not come on and the
beeper may not sound when the occupant is not
stops, the indicator will remain on.
heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such
occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should
The beeper will also periodically sound and be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag
the indicator will blink while driving until the likely will injure or kill them.
driver’s and/or the front passenger’s seat belt 2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 58
is fastened.

Continued 39
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 40 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners 1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
Safe Driving

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to- thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to offer protection in a subsequent crash.
inflate the front airbags.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

40
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 41 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well 1Fastening a Seat Belt
back in the seat: No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 160 belt or one that does not appear to be working
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly. correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working

Safe Driving
Pull out slowly. properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Correct
Seated Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
Posture. retractor mechanism.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then

Latch
Plate tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Buckle

Continued 41
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 42 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as 1Fastening a Seat Belt
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part 3 WARNING
Lap belt as
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
Safe Driving

low as Improperly positioning the seat belts can

possible bones take the force of a crash and reduces cause serious injury or death in a crash.
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to Make sure all seat belts are properly
remove any slack, then check that the belt positioned before driving.
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
of a crash over the strongest bones in your guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
upper body. completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.

■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor 1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
occupants. one level at a time.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button. After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests anchor position is secure.
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
Push

42
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 43 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Advice for Pregnant Women 1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when okay for you to drive.
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the

Safe Driving
belt as low as possible across the hips. To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
Wear the shoulder belt
airbag:
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen. • When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible
across the hips.

43
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 44 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows: 1Seat Belt Inspection

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. 3 WARNING
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
Safe Driving

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can

u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only result in serious injury or death if the seat
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make belts do not work properly when needed.
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper any problem corrected as soon as possible.
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.

44
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 45 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Airbags
Airbag System Components

8 10 9 8 7

Safe Driving
12

8
6

8
11

8
8

Continued 45
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 46 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

The front, front side, and side curtain d An electronic control unit that, when the h Impactsensors that can detect a
airbags are deployed according to the vehicle is on, continually monitors moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
direction and severity of impact. Both side information about the various impact
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
Safe Driving

The airbag system includes: sensor, airbag activators, seat belt you that the front passenger's front
tensioners, and other vehicle airbag has been turned off.
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) information. During a crash event the
front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored unit records such information. j An indicator on the instrument panel that
in the center of the steering wheel; the alerts you to a possible problem with your
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. In airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
dashboard. Both are marked SRS addition, the driver’s and front
AIRBAG. passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate k Safing Sensor
sensors that detect whether or not the
b Two side airbags, one for the driver and belts are fastened. lA rollover sensor that detects whether
one for a front passenger. The airbags are the vehicle is about to roll over.
stored in the outer edges of the seat- fA driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
c Two side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored g Weight sensors in the front passenger’s
in the ceiling, above the side windows. seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
The front and rear pillars are marked turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG. lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).

46
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 47 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

■ Important Facts About Your Airbags 1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,

Safe Driving
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly. deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

47
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 48 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: 1Types of Airbags
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs. in ON.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Safe Driving

Each is discussed in the following pages. After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Front Airbags (SRS) 1Front Airbags (SRS)

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect (SRS)
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger. Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-
threshold front airbags (SRS).
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
restraint system.
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
■ Housing Locations supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and crashes.
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

48
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 49 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control

Safe Driving
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

■ How the Front Airbags Work 1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
front airbag provides supplemental protection is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
for your head and chest. happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
The front airbags deflate immediately so that airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Continued 49
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 50 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ When front airbags should not deploy

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Safe Driving

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.

50
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 51 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Advanced Airbags 1Advanced Airbags

If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants. will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the

Safe Driving
The driver's advanced front airbag system driver's seating position.
includes a seat position sensor.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag • Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
inflates with less force, regardless of the • Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
Driver’s severity of the impact. the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
Seat
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
Position
Sensor • All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system • Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
has weight sensors.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
P. 56
Although we recommend against carrying an
Passenger’s infant or small child in front, if the sensors
Seat detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
Weight
Sensors lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger's front airbag.

51
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 52 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger 1Side Airbags
during a moderate-to-severe side impact. Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
■ Housing Locations prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
Safe Driving

increases your risk of serious injury.

The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seat- Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
backs. They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger
Housing seat.
Location
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
■ Operation covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
When the sensors detect a moderate-to- deploying during a side impact.
When
inflated severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.

Side
Airbag

52
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 53 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough

Safe Driving
impact to deploy the airbag.

■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

53
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 54 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and any passengers 1Side Curtain Airbags
during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
Safe Driving

crashes. tensioners.

■ Housing Locations If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the

passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if
The side curtain airbags are located in the there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle. To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof

pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

54
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 55 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision

One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.

Safe Driving
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the multi-information display.

■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator 1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

■ When the power mode is set to ON 3 WARNING

The indicator comes on for a few seconds, Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
then goes off. This tells you the system is serious injury or death if the airbag systems
working properly. or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as

soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

Continued 55
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 56 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator 1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
■ When the passenger airbag off no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
U.S. Canada
indicator comes on riding there, something may be interfering with the
Safe Driving

The indicator comes on to alert you that the weight sensors, such as:
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight • An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
• A child seat or other object pressing against the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat. rear of the seat-back.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. an object on the seat or floor behind it.
2 Child Safety P. 58 • An object placed under the front passenger's seat.

If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
the indicator will not come on. goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.

56
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 57 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any 1Airbag Care
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
inspected by a dealer in the following situations: system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.

■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision

Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer

This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda
Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda
Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.

57
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 58 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are 1Protecting Child Passengers
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under. 3 WARNING
Safe Driving

Children who are unrestrained or

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province improperly restrained can be seriously
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride injured or killed in a crash.
in a vehicle.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure child should be properly restrained with a
or kill a child sitting in the front seat. seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

• A child in the front seat is more likely to The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
interfere with the driver's ability to safely and Transport Canada recommend that all children
control the vehicle. ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.

58
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 59 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an 1Protecting Child Passengers
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system. 3 WARNING

Safe Driving
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the wrap one around their neck can result in
event of a collision. serious injury or death.

• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would Instruct children not to play with any seat
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries. belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very and locked.
seriously injured in a crash.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments. and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly. front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 71

59
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 60 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children

■ Protecting Infants 1Protecting Infants

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the 3 WARNING
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
Safe Driving

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front

at least one year old. seat can result in serious injury or death
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat during a crash.
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position. Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.

Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a

forward facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions before installation.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 45

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

60
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 61 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Protecting Smaller Children 1Protecting Smaller Children

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child 3 WARNING
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured

Safe Driving
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
forward-facing child seat. front seat can result in serious injury or
■ Forward-facing child seat placement death if the front airbag inflates.
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position. If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations

regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
rear seat is the safest place for a child. for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Continued 61
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 62 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Selecting a Child Seat 1Selecting a Child Seat

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). simple.
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
Safe Driving

are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat to simplify the installation process and reduce the
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual. likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.

■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat

Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

62
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 63 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of

Safe Driving
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Marks

Lower Anchors 2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
Rigid Type
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.

Flexible Type

Continued 63
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 64 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Tether Strap 3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the 1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Hook head restraint. For your child's safety, when using a child seat
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
position, then route the tether strap seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
Safe Driving

between the head restraint legs, and secure that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
the tether strap hook to the anchor.
child or other vehicle occupants.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
Anchor child seat manufacturer.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

64
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 65 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.

Continued 65
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 66 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
rocking it forward and back and side to To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
side; little movement should be felt. and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
Safe Driving

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

66
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 67 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Adding Security with a Tether 1Adding Security with a Tether

Since a tether can provide additional security to the
Tether Anchorage Points A tether anchorage point is provided behind lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
each rear seating position. A child seat that is using a tether whenever one is available.

Safe Driving
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.

Cover 1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage

point and lift the cover.
Anchor

Outer Position Tether Strap 2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
Hook position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.

Anchor

Center Position 3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

Tether Strap
Hook 4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.

Anchor

67
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 68 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children

■ Protecting Larger Children 1Safety of Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind 3 WARNING
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
Safe Driving

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in

must sit in front. front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
have the child sit up properly and wear the
following questions.
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
■ Checklist needed.
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

68
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 69 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

■ Booster Seats 1Booster Seats

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used instructions that came with it, and install the seat
properly, position the child in a booster seat in accordingly.

Safe Driving
a rear seating position. For the child's safety, There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
check that the child meets the booster seat booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
manufacturer's recommendations. belt correctly.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and

territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

■ Monitoring child passengers

We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.

69
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 70 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, 1Carbon Monoxide Gas
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior. 3 WARNING
Safe Driving

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
• The exhaust system may have been damaged. even kill you.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below. An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not turn the power system on with the garage
1. Select the fresh air mode. door closed. Even when the garage door is open,
2. Select the mode. drive out of the garage immediately after turning the
3. Set the fan speed to high. power system on.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.

70
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 71 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer

Safe Driving
for a replacement.

Sun Visor

U.S. models Canadian models

Dashboard
U.S. models only High Voltage System Components

U.S. models Canadian models

Radiator
Cap

71
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 72 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

72
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 73 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 74
Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 88
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges.............................................. 98
Multi-Information Display ................ 100

73
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 74 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Indicators

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Comes on while driving - Make sure
you set the power mode to ON, the parking brake is released. Check the
then goes off if the parking brake brake fluid level.
has been released. 2 What to do when the indicator
U.S. comes on while driving P. 556
● Comes on when the parking brake
Instrument Panel

is applied, and goes off when it is ● Comes on along with the brake
Parking Brake released. system indicator (amber) - Immediately
and Brake ● Comes on when the brake fluid stop in a safe place. Contact a dealer for
Canada
System Indicator level is low. repair. The brake pedal becomes harder
(Red) ● Comes on if there is a problem to operate. Depress the pedal further
with the brake system. than you normally do.
(Red) ● The beeper sounds and the ● Comes on along with the ABS
indicator comes on if you drive indicator - Have your vehicle checked by
with the parking brake not fully a dealer.
released. 2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On P. 556

U.S.
● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly - Avoid high speeds
you set the power mode to ON, and sudden braking. Take the vehicle to a
then goes off. dealer immediately.
Brake System ● Comes on if there is a problem
Canada Indicator with a system related to braking
(Amber) other than the conventional brake
system.
(Amber)

74
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 75 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
POWER ● Comes on if there is a problem
SYSTEM
with the electric vehicle system.

Instrument Panel
Indicator ● Comes on when the High Voltage
battery temperature becomes high
while the battery is being charged.
● Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
READY Indicator then goes off. 2 Turning on the Power P. 416
● Comes on when the vehicle is
ready to drive.
● Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
EV Indicator — —
● Comes on when the vehicle is
moved by the motor, and the
engine is not operating.
● Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
EV Mode ● Comes on when the vehicle is in EV
—
Indicator mode.
2 SPORT HYBRID i-MMD
(intelligent Multi Mode
Drive) P. 10

Continued 75
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 76 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Comes on while driving - Immediately
you set the power mode to ON, stop in a safe place.
Low Oil Pressure
then goes off. 2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Indicator Comes On P. 554
● Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.
Instrument Panel

● Comes on when you set the power ● Readiness codes are part of the on board
mode to ON, and goes off either diagnostics for the emissions control
when the power system is on or systems.
after several seconds if the vehicle 2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 569
did not start. If “readiness codes” ● Comes on while driving - Have your
have not been set, it blinks five vehicle checked by a dealer.
Malfunction times before it goes off. ● Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
Indicator Lamp ● Comes on if there is a problem place where there are no flammable
with the emissions control system. objects. Stop the power system for 10
● Blinks when a misfire in the minutes or more, and wait for the engine
engine's cylinders is detected. to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a
dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 555

● Comes on when you set the power ● Comes on while driving - Turn off the
mode to ON, and goes off when climate control system and rear defogger
12-Volt Battery
the power system is on. in order to reduce electricity
Charging System
● Comes on when the 12-volt consumption.
Indicator
battery is not charging. 2 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging
System Indicator Comes On P. 554

76
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 77 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Shift Lever ● Indicates the current shift lever

2 Shifting P. 422 —
Position Indicator position.

Instrument Panel
● Blinks if the transmission system ● Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
Transmission has a problem. starts and acceleration and have your
Indicator vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

● Comes on when you press the

SPORT Mode SPORT button.
2 SPORT Mode P. 425
Indicator

● Comes on and the beeper sounds ● The beeper stops and the indicator goes
if you are not wearing a seat belt off when you and the front passenger
when you set the power mode to fasten their seat belts.
ON. ● Stays on after you or the front
● If the front passenger is not passenger has fastened the seat belt
Seat Belt
wearing a seat belt, the indicator - A detection error may have occurred in
Reminder
comes on a few seconds later. the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by
Indicator ● Blinks while driving if either you or a dealer.
the front passenger has not 2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 39
fastened a seat belt. The beeper
sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.

Continued 77
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 78 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on when the fuel reserve is ● Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
running low (approximately 2.2 U.S. as possible.
gal./8.2 Liter left). ● Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
● Blinks if there is a problem with the dealer.
Low Fuel fuel gauge.
Instrument Panel

Indicator

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly - Have your

you set the power mode to ON, then vehicle checked by a dealer. With this
Anti-lock Brake goes off. indicator on, your vehicle still has
System (ABS) ● If it comes on at any other time, normal braking ability but no anti-lock
Indicator there is a problem with the ABS. function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
P. 465

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly or does not

you set the power mode to ON, then come on at all - Have your vehicle
goes off. checked by a dealer.
Supplemental ● Comes on if a problem with any of
Restraint System the following is detected:
Indicator - Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner

78
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 79 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly - Have your
you set the power mode to ON, then vehicle checked by a dealer.
Vehicle Stability
goes off. 2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Assist (VSA®) Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
● Blinks when VSA® is active.
System Indicator System P. 454
● Comes on if there is a problem with

Instrument Panel
the VSA® system.
● Comes on for a few seconds when
Vehicle Stability you set the power mode to ON, then
Assist (VSA®) OFF goes off. 2 VSA® OFF Button P. 455 —
Indicator ● Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
● Comes on when you set the power ● Stays on constantly or does not
Electric Power mode to ON, and goes off when the come on at all - Have your vehicle
Steering (EPS) power system is on. checked by a dealer.
System Indicator ● Comes on if there is a problem with 2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
the EPS system. System Indicator Comes On P. 556

Continued 79
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 80 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Comes on while driving - Stop in a
you set the power mode to ON, then safe place, check tire pressures, and
goes off. inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
● May come on briefly if the power ● Stays on after the tires are inflated
mode is set to ON and the vehicle is to the recommended pressures - The
Instrument Panel

not moved within 45 seconds, to system needs to be calibrated.

indicate the calibration process is 2 TPMS Calibration P. 458
not yet complete.
Low Tire Pressure/ ● Comes on when:
TPMS Indicator - One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been
calibrated.
● Blinks for about one minute, and ● Blinks and remains on - Have your
then stays on if there is a problem vehicle checked by a dealer.
with the TPMS.

80
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 81 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when you set ● While the indicator is on, press the
the power mode to ON, then goes off. (information) button to see the
● Comes on along with a beep when a message again.
problem is detected. A system message on ● Refer to the Indicators information in
the multi-information display appears at

Instrument Panel
System this chapter when a system message
Message the same time. appears on the multi-information —
Indicator display. Take the appropriate action for
the message.
● The multi-information display does not return
to the normal screen unless the warning is
canceled, or the button is pressed.
Turn Signal ● Blinks when you operate the turn signal ● Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A
and Hazard lever. turn signal light bulb has blown.
—
Warning ● Blink along with all turn signals when you Change the bulb immediately.
Indicators press the hazard warning button. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 510, 511

High Beam ● Comes on when the high beam headlights

are on. — —
Indicator

● Comes on whenever the light switch is on, ● If you set the power mode to VEHICLE
Lights On or in AUTO when the exterior lights are OFF (LOCK) while the exterior lights are
—
Indicator on. on, a chime sounds when the driver's
door is opened.

Fog Light ● Comes on when the fog lights are on.

— —
Indicator

Continued 81
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 82 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on briefly when you set the ● Blinks - You cannot start the power
power mode to ON, then goes off. system. Set the power mode to VEHICLE
● Comes on if the immobilizer system OFF (LOCK), then select ON again.
cannot recognize the key ● Repeatedly blinks - The system may
Immobilizer
information. be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle —
Instrument Panel

System Indicator
checked by a dealer.
● Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems can occur.
● Blinks when the security system
Security System alarm has been set. 2 Security System Alarm P. 134 —
Alarm Indicator
Indicator

82
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 83 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
ECON Mode
goes off. 2 ECON Button P. 424
Indicator ● Comes on when you press the
ECON button.

Instrument Panel
● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly or does not
you set the power mode to ON, then come on at all - Have your vehicle
goes off. checked by a dealer.
● Comes on as soon as a problem is
Smart Entry
detected in the smart entry system
System Indicator
or push button starting system.

● Comes on when all the operating

Auto High-Beam 2 Auto High-Beam (High Beam
conditions of the auto high-beam —
Indicator (Green) * Support System) * P. 147
are met.

* Not available on all models Continued 83

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 84 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
you set the power mode to ON, checked by a dealer.
then goes off.
● Comes on if there is a problem with
the RDM system.
Instrument Panel

● Comes on when the RDM system ● Stays on - The temperature inside the
shuts itself off. camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool
Road Departure down the camera.
Mitigation (RDM) The system activates when the temperature
Indicator inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427

● Stays on - The area around the camera is

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427

84
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 85 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Comes on while driving - Have your
you set the power mode to ON, vehicle checked by a dealer.
then goes off.
● Comes on if there is a problem with
ACC.

Instrument Panel
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) ● Comes on if anything covers the ● When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
Indicator radar sensor cover and prevents the vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
(Amber) sensor from detecting a vehicle in using a soft cloth.
front. ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
● May come on when driving in bad indicator does not go off even after you
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) clean the sensor cover.
● ACC has been automatically
canceled.
● Comes on when you press the
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429 —
MAIN button.
● Comes on if the temperature inside ● Use the climate control system to cool
Adaptive Cruise the camera is too high. down the camera.
Control (ACC) ● ACC has been automatically ● Goes off - The camera has been cooled
Indicator (Green) canceled. down. Pressing the MAIN button can
resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429

Continued 85
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 86 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
Lane Keeping
you set the power mode to ON, checked by a dealer.
Assist System
then goes off.
(LKAS) Indicator ● Comes on if there is a problem
(Amber)
with the LKAS.
Instrument Panel

Lane Keeping ● Comes on when you press the

Assist System MAIN button. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
—
(LKAS) Indicator P. 447
(Green)

86
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 87 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on for a few seconds when ● Stays on constantly without the
you set the power mode to ON, CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked by
then goes off. a dealer.
● Comes on when you deactivate 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
the CMBSTM. A multi-information (CMBSTM) P. 467

Instrument Panel
display message appears for five
seconds.
● Comes on if there is a problem
with the CMBSTM.

● Comes on when the CMBSTM ● Stays on - The area around the camera is
system shuts itself off. blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
Collision in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
Mitigation cloth.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ● When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
Indicator vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
using a soft cloth.
● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
message does not disappear even after you
clean the sensor cover.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) P. 467

● Stays on - The temperature inside the

camera is too high. Use the climate control
system to cool down the camera. The
system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427

87
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 88 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the (information) button to see the message again
with the system message indicator on.
Message Condition Explanation
● Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
2 Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 555
Instrument Panel

● Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due

soon. 2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-
u Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and Information Display P. 490
Maintenance Past Due follow.

● Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets

abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 551

● Appears when the engine coolant temperature is ● Drive slowly to prevent overheating.
near its upper limit.

● Appears if any door or the trunk is not completely ● Goes off when all doors and the trunk are closed.
closed.
● The beeper sounds and the message comes on if any
door or the trunk is opened while driving.

88
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 89 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears if there is a problem with the automatic ● Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on,
lighting control system. and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Instrument Panel
Models with LED
● Appears if there is a problem with the low beam ● Appears while driving - The low beam headlights
headlights headlights. may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive
safely, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.

Models with
● Appears if there is a problem with the auto high- ● Manually operate the headlight switch.
auto high-beam beam. ● If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.

Models with
● Appears when the area around the camera on the ● Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a
auto high-beam windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. soft cloth.
● If the message does not disappear after cleaning the
lens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Continued 89
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 90 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

Models with ● Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor ● Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with
parking sensor system. The beeper sounds. mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even
system after you clean the area, have the system checked by a
dealer.
Instrument Panel

● Appears if there is a problem with the acoustic ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
vehicle alerting system.

● Appears while you are customizing the settings and

the shift lever is moved out of (P .
2 Customized Features P. 108

● Appears if you try to go to Vehicle Settings from ● Select either display to customize a setting. You cannot
the multi-information display while the audio/ have Vehicle Settings displayed on the multi-
information screen * or audio/information touch information display and audio/information screen
screen * shows the same menu. simultaneously.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314

90 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 91 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON.
2 Turning on the Power P. 416

Instrument Panel
Canadian models
● Appears when the steering wheel is locked. ● Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the POWER button.

● Appears if you push the POWER button to turn the U.S. models
power system off without the shift lever in (P . ● Move the shift lever to (P . The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.
Canadian models
● Push the POWER button twice after moving the shift
lever to (P .
● Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

● Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the ● Press the POWER button twice with your foot off the
power mode is in ACCESSORY. brake pedal to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).

Continued 91
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 92 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when you close the door with the power ● Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote
mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside back inside the vehicle and close the door.
the vehicle. 2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 143
Instrument Panel

● Appears when the smart entry remote battery ● Replace the battery as soon as possible.
becomes weak. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 526

● Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too ● Bring the smart entry remote in front of the POWER
weak to turn on the power system or the key is not button to be touched with.
within operating range to turn on the power system. 2 POWER Button P. 141
A beeper sounds six times. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 546

● Appears three seconds after you bring the smart

entry remote in front of the POWER button when
To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button 2 Changing the Power Mode P. 141
appears. To Start Vehicle: Brake + Push appears
sequentially.
● Appears if there is a problem with the radiator ● Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your
system. vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

92
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 93 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
the 12-volt battery. 2 Checking the 12-Volt Battery P. 525
● Appears when the 12-volt battery is not charging. ● Appears along with the 12-volt battery charging
system indicator - Turn off the climate control system
and rear defogger to reduce electricity consumption.

Instrument Panel
2 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 554

Canadian models
● Appears when the washer fluid gets low. ● Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 505

● Appears for about three seconds when ACC has ● You can resume the set speed after the condition that
been automatically canceled. caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+
button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429

● Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with ● Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the
a vehicle in front of you. brakes, change lanes, etc.).
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
P. 467

Continued 93
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 94 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the area around the camera is ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe appears again after you cleaned the area around the
place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. camera.
● May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,
snow, fog, etc.).
Instrument Panel

● Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too ● Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.
high. ● Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing
● ACC/LKAS has been automatically canceled. the MAIN/LKAS button can resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 429
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 447

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ● Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
● Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected ● The color of either line changes from white to amber as
line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly. the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 447

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ● Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
● Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected ● The color of either line changes from white to amber as
line. the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
When you selected Warning Only 2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 443
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
● You can change the setting for the road departure
vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only
can be selected.
When you selected Normal or Wide
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system
also steers the vehicle to help you remain within
your driving lane.

94
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 95 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper ● Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
sounds simultaneously.

Instrument Panel
● Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS ● If any other system indicators come on, such as the
button is pressed, but there is a problem with a VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels 2 Indicators P. 74
automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.

● Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s door

while the power system is on by smart entry remote.
2 Remote Engine Start P. 418

Continued 95
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 96 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the power system temperature is ● Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be
high. harder to start on an incline.
● Park in a safe place, and cool the system down.
2 Overheating P. 551
Instrument Panel

● Appears when the High Voltage battery temperature ● Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be
is low. harder to start on an incline.
● Goes off once you start driving as the High Voltage
battery warms up.

● Appears after the 12-volt battery charging system ● Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be
indicator comes on. harder to start on an incline.
● Contact a dealer immediately.

● Appears when the High Voltage battery temperature ● You can start the engine and use the climate control
is too low to operate (approx. -22°F [-30°C] or system to warm up the interior, which will also warm
below). the High Voltage battery enough for you to drive the
vehicle.

● Appears when the High Voltage battery and other ● You must wait for an increase in the ambient
system control temperatures are too low to operate temperature or move the vehicle to a warmer location.
(approx. -40°F [-40°C] or below). ● Consult a dealer.

96
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 97 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears if the power system is in diagnostic mode. ● You may notice a decrease in available power. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
● As a result of diagnostics, the POWER SYSTEM
indicator may come on.
2 POWER SYSTEM Indicator P. 75

Instrument Panel
● Appears when you failed to select EV mode or EV ● EV mode is available once the condition is improved or
mode is automatically canceled. the cause that canceled EV mode is cleared.
● The cause may be shown with the following
message:
- Ambient Temperature Too Low
- Battery Charge Too Low
- Engine Too Cold
- Cabin Being Heated
- Speed Too High
- Hard Acceleration Requested

97
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 98 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Gauges and Multi-Information Display

Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, POWER/CHARGE gauge, High
Voltage battery charge level gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when
the power mode is in ON.

■ Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Instrument Panel

■ Fuel Gauge 1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from

the fuel gauge reading.

98
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 99 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuGauges

■ POWER/CHARGE Gauge
■ Electric motor
The degree to which the electric motor is being powered is displayed by the readings
on the POWER side.

■ Battery charge in progress

Instrument Panel
The degree to which the High Voltage battery is being charged is displayed by the
readings on the CHARGE side.

■ High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge 1High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
The High Voltage battery charge level may decrease
Shows the remaining High Voltage battery charge level. under the following conditions:
• When the 12-volt battery has been replaced.
• When the 12-volt battery has been disconnected.
• When the High Voltage battery control system
corrects its reading.

The charge level reading will be corrected

automatically while driving.

Changes in the temperature of the High Voltage

battery can increase or decrease the battery’s
charging capacity. If temperature changes cause the
battery’s capacity to change, the number of
indicators in the battery charge level gauge may also
change, even if the amount of charging remains the
same.

99
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 100 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature
indicator, and other gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

■ Switching the Display

■ Main displays
Instrument Panel

Press the (information) button to change the display.

Average Fuel Average Fuel Economy/

Blank Screen Eco Drive Display Economy Records Instant Fuel Economy Range

Vehicle Engine Oil Power Flow

Settings Life Monitor Average Speed Elapsed Time

Button

100
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 101 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Lower displays
Press the SEL/RESET button to change the display.

Odometer Trip A Trip B

Instrument Panel
SEL/RESET
Button

Continued 101
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 102 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.

■ Trip Meter 1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
Instrument Panel

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last pressing the SEL/RESET button.
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

■ Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip
meter is reset to 0.0.

■ Average Fuel Economy 1Average Fuel Economy

You can change when to reset the average fuel
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 economy.
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the 2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
average fuel economy is also reset.

■ Range 1Range
The displayed range may change even when the
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining power and fuel. This vehicle is stationary.
distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

■ Elapsed Time 1Elapsed Time

Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset. You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295

102
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 103 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Average Speed 1Average Speed

You can change when to reset the average speed.
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was 2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
reset.

■ Instant Fuel Economy

Instrument Panel
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

■ Engine Oil Life

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 489

■ Outside Temperature 1Outside Temperature

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada). Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect. It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

■ Turn-by-Turn Directions * Use the multi-information display's customized

Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
navigation system *.

1Turn-by-Turn Directions *
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295

* Not available on all models Continued 103

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 104 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Average Fuel Economy Records

Shows the average fuel economy for the last
three driving cycles (1-3), and the current
driving cycle (0) in mpg or l/100 km.

Each time you set the power mode to ON, the

Instrument Panel

display is updated, and the oldest record is

deleted.

104
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 105 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Eco Drive Display/Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points 1Eco Drive Display

The ambient meter color changes corresponding to
■ Eco Drive Display the eco drive display.
The vehicle icon on the display moves forward or backward while driving.
The more aggressive the acceleration is, the further the icon moves forward.
The more aggressive the deceleration is, the further the icon moves backward.
Keep the icon near the center of the circle for better fuel economy while driving.

Instrument Panel
Aggressive Moderate Slow Moderate Aggressive
Deceleration Deceleration Acceleration/ Acceleration Acceleration
Deceleration

Vehicle Icon

Blue Blue green Green Blue green Blue

The fuel economy display color changes while driving. The area around the vehicle
icon becomes blue with aggressive acceleration and deceleration, and blue green as
fuel economy gets better, then green when driving in the most fuel efficient style.
Keep the color green as long as possible.

Continued 105
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 106 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points

Appear for a few seconds when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Each has three stages. Depending on your driving style, the leaf icon(s) and the
gauge increase or decrease to indicate that you have reached a different stage of
fuel economy.
Instrument Panel

Drive Cycle Advancing to Advancing to

Score 2nd Stage 3rd Stage

Lifetime Receding to Receding to

Points 2nd Stage 3rd Stage

■ Resetting the Drive Cycle Score

1. Make sure the shift lever is in (P . Turn the power mode to ON.
2. If ECON mode is on, press the ECON button to turn it off.
3. Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
4. Turn the power mode to ON again.
u Make sure to complete steps from 4 through 6 within 30 seconds.
5. Depress the brake pedal twice.
u The color of the ambient meter will change from blue to green.
u When the Fuel Efficiency Backlight setting on the multi-information display
is off, the color stays blue.
6. Press the ECON button twice.
u The color of the ambient meter will turn to monochrome.
7. Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

106
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 107 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Power Flow Monitor 1Power Flow Monitor

While the vehicle is stationary with the engine
Displays the power flow of the motor and engine, indicating the vehicle's power running, the following may appear on the multi-
source and whether the battery is being charged. information display.

Engine ON

Instrument Panel
Power Flow
Engine OFF
Engine

Hybrid (HV) Electric Vehicle (EV) Engine (Direct Drive)

Power is supplied by Power is supplied by The engine is running
the motor and the the motor. and the motor is charging
engine. the High Voltage battery.

Regeneration Power is being The engine is running

The motor is charging supplied by only and the motor is
the High Voltage the engine. charging the High
battery. Voltage battery.

Continued 107
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 108 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Customized Features 1Customized Features

To customize other features, press the
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features. button.
2 List of customizable options P. 111
■ How to customize 2 Example of customization settings P. 114
Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the button while the power
Models with driving position memory system
mode is in ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Instrument Panel

Customization is possible when you see the driver’s

Press the SEL/RESET button. ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) on the screen.
The driver’s ID indicates which remote transmitter
you have used to unlock the driver’s door. The
customized settings are recalled every time you
Multi-Information Display: unlock the driver’s door with that remote.
Goes to Vehicle Settings.
All models
When you customize settings: Shift to (P

Customizing is also available from the audio/

Button: information screen * or audio/information touch
Changes the customize screen *.
menus and items.
You cannot have Vehicle Settings displayed on the
multi-information display while the audio/
SEL/RESET button:
Enters the selected item. information screen * or audio/information touch
screen * shows the same menu.
2 Customized Features P. 295, 314

108 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 109 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Customization flow
Press the button.

Vehicle Settings SEL/RESET

TPMS Calibration

Instrument Panel
Forward Collision Warning Distance
4 Head-up Warning
ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep
Driver Assist System Setup SEL/RESET
4 ACC Display Speed Unit
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
4
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Meter Setup SEL/RESET
4
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing

4
Fuel Efficiency Backlight

SEL/RESET Driving Position Setup * SEL/RESET Memory Position Link

4

Door Unlock Mode

4
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Setup SEL/RESET
4
Keyless Access Beep

4 Remote Start System ON/OFF

* Not available on all models Continued 109

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 110 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

4
Interior Light Dimming Time

Lighting Setup SEL/RESET Headlight Auto Off Timer

4
Instrument Panel

Auto Light Sensitivity

4 Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Door Setup SEL/RESET
4
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
4
4 Security Relock Timer

Maintenance Reset

Default All

SEL/RESET Exit

110
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 111 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ List of customizable options

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

TPMS
— Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate
Calibration

Forward Collision

Instrument Panel
Changes at which distance the CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short
Warning Distance
Head-up Warning Turns the head-up warning lights on to flash or off. On*1/Off

Causes the system to beep when the system detects

ACC Pre-Running Car
a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC On/Off*1
Driver Assist Detect Beep
range.
System
Setup mph*1/km/h (U.S.)
ACC Display Speed Unit Changes the ACC display speed unit.
mph/km/h*1 (Canada)
Road Departure Changes the setting for the road departure Normal*1/Wide/Warning
Mitigation Setting mitigation system. Only

Lane Keeping Assist Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
On/Off*1
Suspend Beep suspended.

*1:Default Setting

Continued 111
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 112 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Language Selection Changes the displayed language. English*1/French/Spanish

Adjust Outside Temp. Adjusts the temperature reading by a few -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.)
Display degrees. -3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada)
Instrument Panel

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, When Refueled/IGN Off/
“Trip A” Reset Timing average fuel economy A, average speed A, and
Meter Setup Manually Reset*1
elapsed time A.

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, When Refueled/IGN Off/
“Trip B” Reset Timing average fuel economy B, average speed B, and
elapsed time B. Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off

Driving Changes the driver's seat position to a stored

Memory Position Link On*1/Off
Position Setup * setting.

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

Door Unlock Mode Driver Door Only*1/All Doors
driver’s door handle.

Keyless Access Light Causes some exterior lights to blink when you On*1/Off
Keyless Access Flash unlock/lock the doors.
Setup Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab
Keyless Access Beep On*1/Off
either front door handle.

Remote Start System Turn the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off
ON/OFF

*1: Default Setting

112 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 113 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Interior Light Dimming Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on 60sec/30sec*1/15sec
Time after you close the doors.
Lighting
Headlight Auto Off Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
Setup 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec
Timer on after you close the driver's door.

Instrument Panel
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Changes the setting for when the doors With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift
Auto Door Lock automatically lock. From P/Off

All Doors When Driver’s

Door Opens*1/All Doors
Changes the setting for when the doors
Auto Door Unlock When Shifted To Park/All
automatically unlock. Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Door Setup
Key And Remote Unlock Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock Driver Door*1/ All Doors
Mode on the first operation of the remote or built-in key.

Keyless Lock Answer LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

On*1/Off
Back LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and

Security Relock Timer the security system to set after you unlock the 90sec/60sec/30sec*1
vehicle without opening any door.

Maintenance Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you

— Cancel/Reset
Reset have performed the maintenance service.

Default All — Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as default. Cancel/Set

*1: Default Setting

Continued 113
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 114 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

■ Example of customization settings

The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are
shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.
1. Press the button to select Vehicle
Settings, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
Instrument Panel

2. Press the button until Meter

Setup appears on the display.
3. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u Language Selection appears first in the
display.

114
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 115 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display

4. Press the button until “Trip A”

Reset Timing appears on the display, then
press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select When Refueled, IGN Off,
Manually Reset, or Exit.

Instrument Panel
5. Press the button and select When
Refueled, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
u The When Refueled Setup screen
appears, then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.

6. Press the button until Exit appears

on the display, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.

115
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 116 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

116
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 117 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock .................................................. 118 Opening and Closing the Windows .... 137 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Opening and Closing the Moonroof *.. 140 Button .......................................... 154
Key Types and Functions .................. 120 Operating the Switches Around the Driving Position Memory System * .... 155
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 157
Strength........................................ 121 POWER Button................................. 141 Adjusting the Mirrors
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Turn Signals ..................................... 144 Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 158
Outside .......................................... 122 Light Switches.................................. 144 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 159
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Fog Lights ........................................ 146 Adjusting the Seats .......................... 160
Inside ............................................. 126 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 128 System) * ........................................ 147 Items ................................................ 167
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 129 Daytime Running Lights ................... 150 Climate Control System
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 130
Wipers and Washers ........................ 151 Using Automatic Climate Control .... 179
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 134 Brightness Control ........................... 153 Synchronized Mode ......................... 181
Security System Alarm...................... 134 Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 182

* Not available on all models 117

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 118 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the power mode is in ON. 1Adjusting the Clock
Models with one display

■ Adjusting the Time These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Models with one display
Rotate to select.
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen Press to enter.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
press . 2 Customized Features P. 295
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
Controls

then Clock Adjustment. You can turn the clock display on and off.
3. Rotate to change hour, then press . 2 Customized Features P. 295
4. Rotate to change minute, then press .

Models with one display

1Using the SETTINGS button
■ Using the SETTINGS button
1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS) To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold
CLOCK (SETTINGS) the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then
Button button until the clock display blinks.
press the (6 (Reset) button.
2. Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to
(6 (Reset) Button adjust the time. Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
(4 (Hour) Button 3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the forward or backward.
time. Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
(5 (Minute) Button

118
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 119 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

Models with two displays 1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen Models with two displays
1. Select , then select Settings. The clock is automatically updated through the audio
2. Select Clock/Info, then Clock system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.
Adjustment.
3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
3/4.
4. Select OK to set the time.

Controls
119
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 120 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following key: 1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
■ Keys immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
Use the smart entry remote to turn on and off 2 Immobilizer System P. 134
the power system, to lock and unlock the
doors and to open the trunk. You can also use The keys contain precision electronics.
the smart entry system to lock and unlock the Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
doors and to open the trunk.
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
Controls

locations with high temperature or high humidity.

• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
■ Smart entry remote If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the power
The built-in key can be used to lock or unlock system may not activate, and the remote transmitter
Release Knob may not work.
the doors when the smart entry remote
If the keys do not work properly, have them
battery becomes weak and the power door inspected by a dealer.
lock/unlock operation is disabled.
You can remotely turn the power system on using the
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while smart entry remote.
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built- 2 Remote Engine Start P. 418
in key, push the built-in key into the smart
Built-in Key
entry remote until it clicks.

120
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 121 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength

■ Key Number Tag 1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
Contains a number that you will need if you safe place outside of your vehicle.
purchase a replacement key. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot activate the

power system, contact a dealer.

Controls
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength 1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the smart entry remote and
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to activate the power system. battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or activating depending on regularity of use.
the power system may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
personal computers.
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.

121
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 122 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
When you carry the smart entry remote, you when you get out. Carry it with you.
can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk. • Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door with the remote is within range.
handle. You can open the trunk within about • The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
the smart entry remote is within range.
release button. • If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
Controls

door sensor may be slow to respond or may not

respond by unlocking the doors.
• After locking the door, wait at least two seconds
■ Locking the doors and the trunk before unlocking it by gripping the handle.
Press the door lock button on the front door. • The door might not open if you pull it immediately
Door Lock Button
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
sounds; all the doors lock; and the
pulling the handle.
security system sets. • Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not
be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry
remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
• The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works

varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 526

You can customize the door lock mode and keyless

lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314

122
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 123 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the doors and the trunk 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
Grab the driver’s door handle: If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
u The driver’s door unlocks. unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the relock.
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle: The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized.
u All the doors unlock.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.

Controls
Trunk Release Button Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button P. 131

Continued 123
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 124 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Using the Remote Transmitter 1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
■ Locking the doors unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
Press the lock button. the doors will automatically relock.
LED
Lock Once: You can change the relock timer setting.
Button u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors 2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
push):
the unlock button.
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
Controls

Unlock Button No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds.
security system is set. Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
■ Unlocking the doors 2 Interior Lights P. 167
Press the unlock button.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
Once:
the operating range may vary depending on the
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the surroundings.
driver's door unlocks.
Twice: You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
u The remaining doors unlock. transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode in VEHICLE OFF.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works

varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 526

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314

124
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 125 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door with a key, all the
Fully insert the key and turn it. other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
Lock time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
doors.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
Unlock

Controls
■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key 1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
■ Locking the driver's door lock at the same time.
Push the lock tab forward a or push the Make sure you have the key in your hand when you
master door lock switch in the lock direction lock the driver’s door, or any of the other doors,
b, and close the door. otherwise you may end up locking the key inside the
vehicle.
■ Locking the passenger's doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

■ Lockout prevention system

The doors cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.

125
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 126 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■ Using the Lock Tab 1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
■ Locking a door driver's door, all the other doors lock at the same
To Lock Lock Tab
Push the lock tab forward. time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
■ Unlocking a door driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
Pull the lock tab rearward.
To Unlock
Controls

126
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 127 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■ Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle 1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The inner front door handles are designed to allow
Pull the front door inner handle. front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
u The door unlocks and opens in one However this feature requires that front seat
motion. occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where

Inner Handle childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 128

Controls
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.

To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using
the multi-information display, audio/information touch screen * or audio/
information screen *.

* Not available on all models Continued 127

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 128 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch 1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the
Press the master door lock switch in as shown master lock switch, all the other doors lock/unlock at
to lock or unlock all the doors. the same time.
To Lock

To Unlock

Master Door
Controls

Lock Switch

Childproof Door Locks 1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
regardless of the position of the lock tab. unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks handle.

Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock

position, and close the door.

■ When opening the door

Open the door using the outside door handle.
Unlock

Lock

128
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 129 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

Your vehicle locks and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is 1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
met. You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information
display, audio/information screen * or audio/
■ Auto Door Locking information touch screen *.
■ Drive lock mode 2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

■ Auto Door Unlocking

■ Driver’s door open mode

Controls
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

* Not available on all models 129

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 130 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Opening and Closing the Trunk

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.

■ Closing the trunk

Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 70
Controls

Using the Trunk Opener

Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.

Trunk
Release

130
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 131 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button

■ Locking the trunk opener

You can lock the trunk release with the built-
in key.

Controls
Using the Trunk Release Button 1Using the Trunk Release Button
• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
Trunk Release Button Push up the release button on the trunk lid when you get out. Carry it with you.
after the doors are unlocked. • A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the carrying it is within range.
trunk if you carry the smart entry remote. • Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
u The beeper will sound. trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
• Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk
lid when closing it.
• Do not place the smart entry remote around the
rear seat when closing the trunk.

131
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 132 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter

Using the Remote Transmitter

Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.

Trunk Button
Controls

Trunk Main Switch 1Trunk Main Switch

If you need to give the key to someone else, remove
The trunk main switch disables the trunk the built-in key from the smart entry remote by
Main Switch
release button on the remote transmitter and sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a
the trunk release button on the trunk lid to valet key.
protect luggage in the trunk.
1. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
ON box.
2. Lock the glove box.
3. Lock the trunk release.
OFF
2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 130

132
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 133 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener

Emergency Trunk Opener

The trunk release lever allows you to open the 1Emergency Trunk Opener
trunk from inside for your safety. Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.

Lever

Controls
133
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 134 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from 1Immobilizer System
starting the motor. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic NOTICE
signals to verify the key. Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Pay attention to the following when selecting the ACCESSORY mode with the Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
POWER button: leave the vehicle unattended.
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the POWER button.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the smart entry vehicle inoperable.
Controls

remote.

Security System Alarm 1Security System Alarm

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly minutes until the security system deactivates.
opened. The alarm does not activate if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the shift lever
is moved out of (P or the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.

■ When the security system alarm activates

The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.

■ To deactivate the security system alarm

Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter, or smart entry system. The system,
along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

134
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 135 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Setting the security system alarm 1Security System Alarm

The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have Do not set the security system alarm when someone
been met: is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
• The power mode is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). accidentally activate when:
• The hood and trunk are closed. • Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• All doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart • Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
entry system.
• Opening the hood with the hood release.
• Moving the shift lever out of (P .
■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the

Controls
If the 12-volt battery goes dead after you have set the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set. security system alarm, the security alarm may activate
once the 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
■ To cancel the security system alarm
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter, or smart entry system. The security system indicator goes off at the Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
same time. device to it.

Continued 135
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 136 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
Controls

Panic Button

■ Canceling panic mode

Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON.

136
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 137 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Opening and Closing the Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, 1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to open and
close all of the windows. 3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver's seat.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, you can only operate the driver's
window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.

Controls
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ Automatic operation Opening either front door cancels this function.
On
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
Off Auto Reverse
Power Window To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
If a power window senses resistance when closing
Lock Button
automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
Driver’s The window opens or closes completely. To
Window stop the window at any time, push or pull the The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
Switch Indicator switch briefly. when you continuously pull up the switch.
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch ■ Manual operation The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.

Continued 137
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 138 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Close

Open
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
Controls

■ Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote

To open: Press the unlock button, and then
within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.

If the windows and moonroof stop midway,

repeat the procedure.

Unlock
Button

138
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 139 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key

To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
Close To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
Open central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.

Controls
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.

139
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 140 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Opening and Closing the Moonroof *

■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof 1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch 3 WARNING
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof. Opening or closing the moonroof on
■ Automatic operation someone's hands or fingers can cause
Open To open: Pull the switch back firmly. serious injury.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
The moonroof will automatically open or close the moonroof before opening or closing it.
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
Controls

Close Tilt touch the switch briefly.

NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
■ Manual operation temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
hold it until the desired position is reached. minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
switch. function causes the moonroof to change directions,
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
release. moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.

140 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 141 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

POWER Button
■ Changing the Power Mode 1POWER Button
POWER Button Operating Range

Operating Range
Indicator VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked*1. The power to all
electrical components is turned off.

Controls
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks (from ON to
You can start the power system when the smart entry
ACCESSORY). Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position. remote is inside the vehicle.
The power system may also start if the smart entry
remote is close to the door or window, even if it is
outside the vehicle.

ON ON mode:
Indicator in the button is on. Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
All electrical components can be used.
If the smart entry remote battery is weak, beeper
Without pressing sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start
the brake pedal Button message appears on the multi-information
Press the button. display.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
Press the button without the shift lever in (P . P. 546
Shift to (P then press the button.
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
U.S. models when you get out.
Shift to (P .
*1 : Canadian models
Continued 141
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 142 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button

■ Automatic Power Off 1Changing the Power Mode

Canadian models
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P and the power If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to OFF to ACCESSORY, press the POWER button while
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the 12-volt battery drain. moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering
wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.
When in this mode:
Canadian models
The steering wheel does not lock.
Controls

All models
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.

Press the POWER button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

■ Power Mode Reminder

If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.

142
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 143 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button

■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder 1Smart Entry Remote Reminder

When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/ operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
or outside the vehicle to remind you that the warning function cancels.
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
back inside, place within the system’s after the power system has been turned on, you can
no longer change the POWER button mode or
operational range.
restart the power system. Always make sure if the
remote is in your vehicle when you operate the
■ When the power mode is in ON

Controls
POWER button.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
warning buzzers sound from both inside and through a window does not activate the warning
outside the vehicle. A warning message on buzzer.
the multi-information display notifies the
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
driver inside that the remote is out. or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to activate. Under some other conditions that can
■ When the power mode is in prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
ACCESSORY warning buzzer may also activate even if the remote
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the is within the system’s operational range.
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.

143
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 144 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the power
Right Turn mode is in ON.
■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
Left Turn
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Controls

Light Switches 1Light Switches

If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
■ Manual Operation while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
High Beams Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the power mode When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
setting. instrument panel will be on.
■ High beams 2 Lights On Indicator P. 81
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
■ Low beams
abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Flashing the high beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to
Low Beams return to low beams. Do not leave the lights on when the power system is
Turns on parking, side marker, ■ Flashing the high beams off because it will cause the 12-volt battery to
tail, and rear license plate lights Pull the lever back, and release it. discharge.
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights

144
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 145 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Automatic Lighting Control 1Automatic Lighting Control

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
Automatic lighting control can be used when when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
the power mode is in ON. such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the The light sensor is in the location shown below.
headlights and other exterior lights will switch Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
on and off automatically depending on the
work properly.
ambient brightness.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity Models without automatic

Controls
intermittent wipers
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
Light Sensor

Models with automatic

intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

Continued 145
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 146 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights

■ Headlight Integration with Wipers * 1Automatic Lighting Control

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The exterior lights come on
Setting
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped. when the ambient light is at
MAX
Bright
■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature HIGH
MID
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
LOW
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with Dark
you, and close the driver’s door. MIN
Controls

u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314 1Headlight Integration with Wipers *
This feature activates while the headlights are off in
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but
AUTO.
do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the
The instrument panel brightness does not change
switch is in the AUTO position).
when the headlights come on.
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
the number of wiper sweeps.

Fog Lights 1Fog Lights

When the low beam headlights are on, turn When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights. instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator P. 81

Fog Light Switch

146 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 147 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) *

Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) *

Uses the camera attached to the windshield, monitors the space ahead of your 1Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) *
vehicle, and automatically changes the low beam headlights to high beam The auto high-beam determines when to change the
headlights when necessary. headlight beams by responding to the brightness of
The system operates when: the lights ahead of your vehicle. In the following
■ The headlight switch is in cases, however, the system may not respond to the
AUTO. lights properly:
■ The lever is in the low beam • The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
position. oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
■ The system recognizes that you • Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
are driving at night and the fog, windshield frost, etc.).
low beam headlights come on. • Other light sources, such as streetlights and electric

Controls
■ The vehicle speed is above 25 billboards are illuminating the road ahead.
mph (40 km/h).
• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
• The road is bumpy or has many curves.
• A vehicle ahead of you suddenly cuts you off or is
The system changes between high and low beam headlights when:
not traveling in the appropriate direction.
The camera is not detecting any lights coming from preceding or oncoming • Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
vehicles: The headlights change to high beams.
The camera detects lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle: The If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient
headlights are returned to low beams. for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
The camera monitors the range within the 30-degree view angle. The distance that
the camera can detect lights ahead differs depending on conditions, such as the
brightness of the lights and the weather.

15-degree

* Not available on all models Continued 147

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 148 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) *

■ To Operate the System 1To Operate the System

For the auto high-beam to work properly:
Turn the headlight switch in AUTO and pull • Do not place an object that reflects light on the
the headlight lever to low beam. dashboard.
2 Light Switches P. 144 • Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
The auto high-beam indicator (Green) comes apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
on. • Do not attach an object, sticker or film in the area
around the camera.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
Headlight
Controls

Switch
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of
the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
■ Temporary cancellation
The auto high-beam operation is temporarily canceled while: To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
• You are continuously driving at a speed below 15 mph (24 km/h). temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
• The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).
of the vehicle away from the sun.
• The windshield wipers run at high speed for more than a few seconds. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to
cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can
The system operation resumes once the condition that caused it to cancel improves. concentrate heat on the camera.

If the Can Not Operate: message appears:

Park your vehicle in a safe place. Wipe away debris
blocking the windshield, then start driving again. If
the message remains on even after driving for a while
with the clean windshield, have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.

148
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 149 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System) *

■ To Disable the System 1To Disable the System

The auto high-beam will remain in the selected
Disable the system when the vehicle is parked disabled or enabled setting each time you turn the
AUTO Position with the power mode in ON and the light power system on.
switch is in the AUTO position.
To disable the system: Pull the light switch
lever towards you and hold it for 40 seconds.
The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will
blink twice.
To enable the system: Pull the light switch

Controls
lever towards you and hold it for 30 seconds.
The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will
blink once.

149
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 150 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights

Daytime Running Lights

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:

• The power mode is ON.

• The headlight switch is off, or in .
• The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
Controls

150
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 151 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be 1Wipers and Washers
used when the power mode is in ON.
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
■ MIST The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
The wipers run at high speed until you release blades will get damaged.
Pull to
the lever.
use
washer. NOTICE
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT *, LO, HI) In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
Change the wiper switch setting according to windshield.
the amount of rain. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage

Controls
Adjustment Ring the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
MIST ■ AUTO *
2 Automatic Intermittent Wipers * P. 152 Models without automatic intermittent wipers
OFF
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
INT: Low speed with ■ Adjusting wiper operation operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
intermittent interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
LO: Low speed wipe Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
wipers make a single sweep.
operation. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest
HI: High speed wipe
Lower speed, fewer sweeps delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.

All models
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
Higher speed, more sweeps
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
■ Washer overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield,
then stop.

* Not available on all models Continued 151

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 152 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

■ Automatic Intermittent Wipers * 1Wipers and Washers

If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into place.
the automatic mode. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then
The wipers operate intermittently, at low remove the obstacle.
speed, or at high speed and stops in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the 1Automatic Intermittent Wipers *
Adjustment Ring rainfall sensor detects. The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Controls

Rainfall Sensor
■ AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When in AUTO, you can also adjust the
rainfall sensor sensitivity using the adjustment
ring.

Sensor sensitivity
Low Sensitivity:
Wipers will operate when more
rainfall is detected.
Do not put the wiper lever in AUTO when cleaning
the windshield or driving through a car wash. If the
High Sensitivity: wiper lever is in AUTO, and the power mode is in ON,
Wipers will operate when less rainfall the rainfall sensor may respond to your hand or car
is detected. wash liquids, and the wipers may operate
automatically.

152 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 153 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the 1Brightness Control
power mode is in ON, you can use the Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
brightness control knob to adjust instrument whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
panel brightness. instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right. on.
Control Knob Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob switches the
display.
You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness

Controls
seconds after you have adjusted the display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
brightness, you will be returned to the the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
previous screen. parking lights are on.

The brightness can be set differently for when the

■ Brightness level indicator
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
The brightness level is shown on the multi-
information display while you are adjusting it.

153
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 154 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window 1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
and mirrors when the power mode is in ON. NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors careful not to damage the heating wires.
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
depending on the outside temperature. along the defogger heating wires.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
when the window has been defogged. Also, do not
switch off. use the system for a long time while the power
Controls

system is off. This may weaken the 12-volt battery,

making it difficult to turn the power system on.

154
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 155 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

Driving Position Memory System *

You can store two driver’s seat positions with the driving position memory system. 1Driving Position Memory System *
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote, the seat adjusts Using the multi-information display, audio/
automatically to one of the two preset positions. information screen * or audio/information touch
screen *, you can disable the automatic seat
When you enter the vehicle, the multi-information display briefly shows you which adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314
remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle.
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1. System Operation
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2. The system will not operate if:
DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2 • The vehicle speed is above 2 mph (3 km/h).
• Either memory position button is pressed while the

Controls
seat is in motion.
• The seat position is adjusted while in operation.
• The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.

* Not available on all models Continued 155

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 156 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

■ Storing a Position in Memory 1Storing a Position in Memory

After you press the SET button, the storing operation
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the will be canceled when:
driver’s seat to the desired position. • You do not press the memory button within five
Memory
Button 1 2. Press the SET button. seconds.
u You will hear a beep, and the memory • You readjust the seat position before the double-
Memory button indicator light will blink. beep.
Button 2 • You set the power mode to any position except
3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2
ON.
within five seconds of pressing the SET
button.
Controls

SET Button
u Once the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.

■ Recalling the Stored Position 1Recalling the Stored Position

The seat will stop moving if you:
1. Move the shift lever to (P . • Press the SET button or memory button (1 or (2 .
2. Apply the parking brake. • Adjust the seat position.
Memory
Button 1 3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ). • Shift into a position other than (P .
u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
Memory light will blink.
Button 2

The seat will automatically move to the

memorized position. When it has finished
moving, you will hear a beep, and the
indicator light stays on.

156
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 157 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you 1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. 3 WARNING
To adjust u The steering wheel adjustment lever is Adjusting the steering wheel position while
under the steering column. driving may cause you to lose control of the
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument Adjust the steering wheel only when the
panel gauges and indicators. vehicle is stopped.

Controls
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
Lever To lock down to lock the steering wheel in position. Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
u After adjusting the position, make sure start driving.
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.

157
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 158 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving 1Adjusting the Mirrors
position. Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions * Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
Tab
Flip the tab to switch the position. 2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 160
Up The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
Controls

Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position

■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror * 1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *

The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
When you are driving after dark, the position is in (R .
automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces
Up the glare from headlights behind you, based
in inputs from the mirror sensor. This feature
is always active.

Down
Sensor

158 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 159 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Power Door Mirrors

You can adjust the door mirrors when the
power mode is in ON.
Selector Switch
■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
Adjustment Switch the switch left, right, up, or down to move the

Controls
mirror.

■ Expanded View Driver's Mirror 1Expanded View Driver's Mirror

Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
Outer Segment The driver side door mirror has outer and inner door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of
segments. the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide appear.
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
are not visible using a standard door mirror.

Inner Segment

159
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 160 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Adjusting the Seats

Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible 1Adjusting the Seats
Allow sufficient
space. while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, 3 WARNING
well back in the seat and be able to Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
adequately press the pedals without leaning in serious injury or death if the front
forward, and grip the steering wheel airbags inflate.
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far Always sit as far back from the front
Move back. back from the front airbag in the dashboard airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Controls

as possible.

■ Adjusting the front power seat(s) * The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Horizontal Position Lumbar Support
Adjustment Adjustment Always make seat adjustments before driving.
(Driver’s seat only)

Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment

160 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 161 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Adjusting the front passenger’s manual seat * 1Adjusting the front passenger’s manual seat *
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Controls
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.

Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to
move the seat, then
release the bar.

* Not available on all models Continued 161

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 162 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs 1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, 3 WARNING

upright position, leaving ample space Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
between your chest and the airbag cover in serious injury or death in a crash.
the center of the steering wheel.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
The front seat passenger should also adjust and sit well back in the seat.
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Controls

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the

seat-back and your back.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the operation.
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury. If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.

162
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 163 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions. 1Head Restraints

■ Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
Head restraints are most effective for
reduces their effectiveness and increases
protection against whiplash and other rear-
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the Make sure head restraints are in place and
center of the restraint. The tops of the positioned properly before driving.
occupant's ears should be level with the

Controls
center height of the restraint. In order for the head restraint system to work
Position head in the center
properly:
of the head restraint.
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. from the restraint legs.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down • Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
while pressing the release button.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.

Continued 163
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 164 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

■ Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions

A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
Controls

button.

■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints 1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair. 3 WARNING

Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
To remove a head restraint:
head restraints can result in severe injury
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
during a crash.
restraint up and out.
Always replace the head restraints before
To reinstall a head restraint: driving.
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.

164
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 165 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their 1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the power 3 WARNING
system is off. Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly with your feet on the floor.
increased.

Controls
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

165
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 166 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Armrest
■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.
Controls

166
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 167 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches 1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out
■ ON and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The interior lights come on regardless of The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
whether the doors are open or closed. situations:
Off
■ Door activated • When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.
The interior lights come on in the following • When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
situations:
Door Activated Position You can change the interior lights dimming time.
• When any of the doors are opened. 2 Customized Features P. 108, 295
• You unlock the driver's door.

Controls
Door Activated • When the power mode is set to VEHICLE The interior lights go off immediately in the following
Position On OFF (LOCK). situations:
■ OFF • When you lock the driver's door.
Off • When you set the power mode to ON.
The interior lights remain off regardless of
• When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
whether the doors are open or closed.
mode.

If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF

(LOCK) mode, the interior lights go off after about 15
minutes.

Continued 167
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 168 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

■ Map Lights 1Map Lights

When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
The map lights can be turned on and off by position and any door is open, the map light will not
pressing the lenses. go off when you press the lens.
Controls

168
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 169 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items

■ Glove Box 1Glove Box

Glove Box
Pull the handle to open the glove box. 3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
Handle You can lock the glove box with the built-in to your passenger in a crash, even if the
key. passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while

driving.

Controls
To Lock

■ Console Compartment
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.

Continued 169
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 170 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Center Pocket
Pull the handle to open the pocket.

Handle
Controls

170
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 171 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Beverage Holders 1Beverage Holders

NOTICE
■ Front seat beverage holders
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
Are located in the console between the front electrical components in the interior.
seats.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls
■ Front door beverage holders

■ Rear seat beverage holders

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.

Continued 171
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 172 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Accessory Power Sockets 1Accessory Power Sockets

NOTICE
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
or ON. element: The power socket can overheat.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it. The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent battery drain, use the power socket only

Controls

when the power system is on.

When both sockets are being used, the combined

power rating of the accessories should not exceed
■ Accessory power socket (console 180 watts (15 amps).
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

172
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 173 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Wireless Charger * 1Wireless Charger *

To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. 3 CAUTION
Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows: Metal objects between the charge pad
Green Indicator 1. To turn the system on and off, press and and the device to be charged will get
hold the (power) button. hot and can burn you.
Amber Indicator
u When the system is activated, the green • Always remove foreign objects from
indicator light comes on. the charge pad before charging the
2. Place the device you want to charge on the device.
charging area.

Controls
• Be sure the surface is clear of dust and
u The system will automatically start other debris before charging.
charging the device, and the amber • Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks,
indicator light will come on. etc.) on the charger and the device.
u Make sure that the device is compatible • Do not use oil, grease, alcohol,
with the system, and placed with the benzine or thinner for cleaning the
chargeable side in the center of the charge pad.
(Power)
Button Charging Area charging area. • Do not cover the system with towels,
3. When charging is completed, the green clothing, or other objects while
indicator light will come on. charging etc.
u Depending on the device, the amber • Avoid spraying aerosols which may
indicator light will stay on. come in contact with the change pad
surface.

This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the

system for a long time when the power system is off.
This may weaken the 12-volt battery, making it
difficult to turn the power system on.

When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual that
came with the compatible device you want to charge.

* Not available on all models Continued 173

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 174 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ When charging does not start 1Wireless Charger *

Perform one of the solutions in the following table. NOTICE
Do not place any magnetic recording media or
Indicator Cause Solution precision machines within the charging area while
charging.
There is an obstacle(s) between The data on your cards such as credit cards can be
Remove the
the charging area and the lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision
obstacle(s).
Green Blinking device. machines such as watches can go wrong.
& simulta- Move the device to the “Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks
Amber neously The device is not within the center of the charging owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
Controls

charging area. area where is

In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
located. • The device is already fully charged.
• The temperature of the device is extremely high
Contact a dealer for while charging.
Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty. • You are at a place that emits strong
repairs.
electromagnetic wave or noises such as TV station,
electric power plant, or gas station.

A device may not charge if the size or shape of its

chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the
charging area.

Not all devices are compatible with the system.

During the charging phase, it is normal for the

charging area and device to heat up.

Charging may be briefly interrupted when:

• All the doors or the trunk are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning
of the smart entry system.
• The position of the device is altered.

Do not charge more than one device at a time on a

charging area.

174 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 175 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Coat Hook 1Coat Hook

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab items.
handle. Pull it down to use it.

Controls
■ Cargo Hook 1Cargo Hook
Heavy objects may damage the hook.
The cargo hook in the trunk can be used to Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than
install a net for securing items. 6.6 lbs (3 kg).

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,

placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413

Continued 175
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 176 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Cargo Area 1Cargo Area

NOTICE
In addition to the larger cargo area, the trunk
Heavy objects may damage the trunk shelf.
incorporates a small shelf above the High Make sure any items put on the shelf weigh less than
Trunk Voltage (HV) battery module that can carry up 15.4 lbs (7kg).
Shelf to 15.4 lbs (7kg). Do not exceed this capacity.
3 WARNING
Be aware that this vehicle was not designed to Carrying a spare tire in the trunk can result
carry a spare tire. This is because the spare in damage to the High Voltage battery and
could be forced into the HV battery and cause
Controls

leakage of flammable electrolyte if your

leakage of flammable electrolyte in the event vehicle were to get severely impacted from
your vehicle were to be severely impacted the rear.
from the rear.
Do not carry a spare tire in the trunk.
In the event a flat tire, a tire repair kit is
provided beneath the trunk floor.
2 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire P. 536

■ Sunglasses Holder 1Sunglasses Holder

Keep the holder closed while driving except when
To open the sunglasses holder, push and accessing stored items.
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.

You can store eyeglasses and other small

items in this holder.
Push

176
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 177 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Front Seat Heaters * 1Front Seat Heaters *

The power mode must be in ON to use the 3 WARNING

seat heaters. Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense

temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat

Controls
heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the

While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-
u The appropriate indicator will be on volt battery may be weakened, making the power
system difficult to start.
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
the heater off. The indicator will be off. does not automatically turn off.

* Not available on all models Continued 177

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 178 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Rear Seat Heaters * 1Rear Seat Heaters *

The power mode must be in ON to use the 3 WARNING

seat heaters. Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position. Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
u The appropriate indicator will be on with sensitive skin should not use seat
Controls

while the seat heater is on. heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the

power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-
volt battery may be weakened, making the power
system difficult to start.

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and

does not automatically turn off.

178 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 179 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. 1Using Automatic Climate Control
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible. control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
Dashboard vents Dashboard and floor Floor vents Floor and
and back of the vents, and back of defroster
center console the center console vents To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO

Controls
AUTO Button (Recirculation) Button button is pressed.

Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
Temperature Temperature more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
Control Buttons Control Buttons turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
/ (Fan Control) Buttons A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

Use the system when the power system is in ON. When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control Pressing the button switches the climate
buttons. control system between on and off. When turned on,
3. Press the (on/off) button to cancel. the system returns to your last selection.

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes

Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
Continued 179
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 180 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows 1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
Pressing the button turns the air through all the windows before driving.
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode. Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
Press the button again to turn off, the When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
system returns to the previous settings. windshield may fog up.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that

Controls

the air hits the side windows.

■ To rapidly defrost the windows 1To rapidly defrost the windows

1. Press the button. After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
2. Press the button. mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.

180
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 181 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode

Synchronized Mode
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.

When the system is in dual mode, the driver side

temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.

Models with navigation system

The system adjusts each temperature based on the

Controls
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system.

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.

1. Press the SYNC button.

u The system will switch to the synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control buttons.

Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

181
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 182 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
Sensor any liquid on them.
Controls

Sensor

182
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 183 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System Models with two displays HondaLink® ..................................... 267

About Your Audio System................ 184 Audio System Basic Operation ........ 213 Wi-Fi Connection............................. 272
USB Port(s *) ..................................... 185 Audio/Information Screen ................ 214 Apple CarPlay® ................................ 274
Auxiliary Input Jack * ........................ 186 Audio/Information Touch Screen...... 216 Android AutoTM ............................... 278
Audio System Theft Protection * ....... 187 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 230 Siri® Eyes Free .................................. 282
Audio Remote Controls.................... 188 Display Setup ................................... 231 Audio Error Messages ...................... 283
Models with one display Voice Control Operation .................. 233 General Information on the Audio
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 190 Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 237 System ............................................. 288
Audio/Information Screen ................ 191 Playing SiriusXM® Radio * ................. 241 Customized Features................ 295, 314
Display Setup ................................... 196 Playing a CD .................................... 249 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * ... 338
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 197 Playing an iPod ................................ 252 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 340, 371
Playing a CD .................................... 199 Song By VoiceTM (SBV)...................... 255 Compass * .......................................... 406
Playing an iPod ................................ 202 Playing Pandora® *............................ 259
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 205 Playing AhaTM................................... 261
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 208 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 262
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 211 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 265

* Not available on all models 183

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 184 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service *. It can also 1About Your Audio System
play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis
Bluetooth® devices. only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio,
contact a dealer.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel or 2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 288
the icons on the touchscreen interface *.
Models with one display SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
iPod
SiriusXM® is a trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.

Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
USB supported.
Features

Remote Controls Flash

Drive
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

Models with two displays handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
iPod

USB
Remote Controls Flash
Drive

184 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 185 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s *)

USB Port(s *)
In Center Pocket 1. Open the cover. 1USB Port(s *)
2. Install the iPod USB connector or the USB • Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
flash drive to the USB port. vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
Models with one display
• We recommend using an extension cable with the
u The USB port (1.0 A) is for playing audio USB port.
files on a USB flash drive and connecting • Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
a cellular phone and charging device. hub.
Models with two displays • Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
u The USB port (1.5 A) is for charging
damaged.
devices, playing audio files and • We recommend backing up your data before using
connecting compatible phones with the device in your vehicle.
Apple CarPlay® or Android AutoTM. • Displayed messages may vary depending on the

Features
device model and software version.
In Console Compartment * ■ In the console compartment *
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
The USB port (1.0 A) is for playing audio files
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
on the USB flash drive and connecting a reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
cellular phone and charging device. provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.

USB charge
The USB port can supply up to 1.0 A/1.5 A of power.
It does not output 1.0 A/1.5 A unless requested by
the device. For amperage details, read the operating
manual of the device that needs to be charged.
Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON first.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the

port may generate noise in the radio you are listening
to.

* Not available on all models 185

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 186 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack *

Auxiliary Input Jack *

Use the jack to connect standard audio devices. 1Auxiliary Input Jack *
1. Open the AUX cover. You can return to AUX mode by pressing the AUX
2. Connect a standard audio device to the button.
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug. Replacement of the audio system with other than a
u The audio system automatically switches genuine Honda system may make the auxiliary jack
inoperable.
to the AUX mode.
Features

186 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 187 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection *

Audio System Theft Protection *

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

■ Reactivating the audio system

1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

Features
* Not available on all models 187
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 188 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. 1Audio Remote Controls
SOURCE Button SOURCE Button Some modes appear only when an appropriate
Cycles through the audio modes as follows: device or medium is used.
Models with one display
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
(+ Button FMAMCDUSBiPod some functions may not be operated.
Button Bluetooth® AudioPandora® *AUX
Button (- Button Models with two displays
MENU FMAMSiriusXM® *CDUSBiPod
Button * Pandora® *Bluetooth® AudioAudio Apps

(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press (+ : To increase the volume.
Features

Press (- : To decrease the volume.

Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora® *
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.
188 * Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 189 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Models with two displays 1Audio Remote Controls

Steering Wheel MENU Button The MENU button is available only when the audio
To choose options for the current audio device, press MENU, Audio Menu, and mode is FM, AM, SiriusXM® *, CD, USB, iPod,
then SOURCE. Pandora® *, or Bluetooth® Audio.
Options available to you for each audio device:
• Radio: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Save Preset, Seek Up, or Seek
Down.
• HD RadioTM*: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Save Preset, Seek Up, or Seek
Down.
• SiriusXM® *: You can select Scan, Save Preset, Channel Up, Channel Down,
Category Up, or Category Down.
• CD or USB flash drive: You can select Scan Folders, Scan Tracks, Repeat

Features
Folder, Repeat Track, Random in Folder, or Random All Tracks.
• iPod: You can select Play/Pause, Repeat Song, Shuffle Albums, or Shuffle All
Songs.
• Bluetooth® Audio: You can select Pause or Play.
• Pandora® *: You can select Like, Dislike, Bookmark, or Play/Pause.

To choose options for the navigation system while it is in operation, press MENU,
select Navigation Menu, and then SOURCE.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

To choose options for HFL, press MENU, select Phone Menu, and then SOURCE.
You can select Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial.

To choose options for the display setting, press MENU, select Display Setting, and
then SOURCE.
You can select Brightness, Contrast, or Black Level.

* Not available on all models 189

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 190 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with one display 1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. These indications are used to show how to operate
BACK Button MENU Button
Use the selector knob or MENU button to the selector knob.
access some audio functions. Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions. Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 198
2 Radio text P. 198
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll 2 Music Search P. 200, 203, 209
Button Selector Knob through the available choices. Press to set 2 Scan P. 198, 201, 210
your selection. 2 Random/Repeat P. 201, 204, 210
MENU button: Press to select any mode.
Features

The available mode includes Change Source, This product includes software codes licensed under
the conditions stated by the copyright holder.
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
For license conditions and the copy of the
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes corresponding source code, visit: http://
can be also selected from Scan, Random/ www.hondaopensource1.com/002
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press once and make an adjustment.
u Each time you press , the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.

190
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 191 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display

Press the (display) button to change the display.

Trip Computer
(Display) Button Audio (Current Drive)

Audio/Information Screen

Features
Trip Computer
Clock/Wallpaper (History of Trip A)

Continued 191
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 192 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.

■ Trip computer (Current Drive)

Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)

Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,
as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three
driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
Features

history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

192
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 193 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup 1Wallpaper Setup

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen. in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
■ Import wallpaper • The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash • The file format of the image that can be imported
drive. is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
• The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
• The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
port. the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185 image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
2. Press the SETTINGS button. the extra area appearing in black.
3. Rotate to select System Settings, then • Up to 255 files can be selected.
press . • If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,

Features
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, the No files detected message appears.
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
4. Rotate to select Add New Wallpaper,
then press .
u The preview of the imported data is
displayed.
5. Rotate to select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
6. Press to save the data.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.

* Not available on all models Continued 193

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 194 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper 1Wallpaper Setup

1. Press the SETTINGS button. From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . and press to see a preview at full-size screen.
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Set, then press .

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Features

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .

u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely. To go back to the previous screen, press to select
OK, or press the BACK button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be

previewed.

194
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 195 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press the SETTINGS button. 1Adjusting the Sound
SETTINGS Button
2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
press . SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
3. Rotate to select Sound, then press . speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Rotate to scroll through the following

choices:
Selector Knob

Bass

Features
Treble

Fader

Balance

Speed-sensitive
SVC Volume
Compensation

195
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 196 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness 1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level
1. Press the SETTINGS button. settings in the same manner.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.
4. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.
Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .

196
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 197 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

Audio/Information Screen

FM/AM Button

Features
Press to select a band.

VOL/ (Power/volume) Seek/Skip Buttons

Knob Press and to search up and
Press to turn the audio system down the selected band for a
on and off. station with a strong signal.
Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button MENU Button

Press to go back to the Press to display the menu items.
previous display or cancel a
setting.
Selector Knob
Preset Buttons (1-6) Turn to tune the radio frequency.
To store a station: Press and turn to select an item,
Tune to the selected station. then press to set your selection.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

Continued 197
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 198 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS) 1Playing AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station. Switching the Audio Mode
2. Rotate to select the station, then press . Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 188
■ Manual update You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the MENU
Updates your available station list at any time.
screen.
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select Refresh, then press . You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
Features

■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1Radio Data System (RDS)
1. Press the MENU button.
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press . automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
■ Scan signals of that station become weak, the display
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. changes from the station name to the frequency.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press to select Stop, or press the BACK button.

198
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 199 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.

Audio/Information Screen

Features
CD Slot
CD Button Insert a CD about halfway into the
Press to play a CD. CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
VOL/ (Power/volume) Press to eject a CD.
Knob
Press to turn the audio system Seek/Skip Buttons
on and off. Press or to change tracks
Turn to adjust the volume. (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Press and hold to move rapidly
BACK Button within a track/file.
Press to go back to the MENU Button
previous display or cancel a Press to display the menu items.
setting.
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued 199
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 200 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List 1Playing a CD

(MP3/WMA/AAC) NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
1. Press the MENU button. cause the CD to jam in the unit.
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press . WMA files protected by digital rights management
3. Rotate to select a folder. (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
4. Press to change the display to a list of
skips to the next file.
files in that folder.
5. Rotate to select a file, then press . Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
Folder Selection • When you change the audio mode to CD.
Features

• When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

File Selection

200
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 201 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file. Scan
1. Press the MENU button. Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/ sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
Repeat, then press .
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press . WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
Random/Repeat the current folder.
is selected. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files

Features
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.

■ To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

201
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 202 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX
button.
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185

Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.

Album Art
Features

AUX Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).

VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system Seek/Skip Buttons
on and off. Press or to change songs.
Turn to adjust the volume. Press and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
BACK Button MENU Button
Press to go back to the Press to display the menu items.
previous display or cancel a
setting.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

202 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 203 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List 1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
1. Press the MENU button. versions. Some functions may not be available on the
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then vehicle's audio system.
press .
3. Rotate to select a menu. If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
4. Press to display the items on that menu. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 284
5. Rotate to select an item, then press .

Features
Continued 203
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 204 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. Repeat Song: Repeats the current file.
1. Press the MENU button. Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a
2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
press .
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press . selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Features

■ To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

204
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 205 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

U.S. models 1Playing Internet Radio

Compatible phones only Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
Playing Internet Radio dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora®,
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®. the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are
iPhone trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media,
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port. Inc. Used with permission. Pandora® is only available in
Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode. certain countries. Please visit
http://www.pandora.com/legal for more information.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this

feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.

Features
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.

Pandora® is free personalized radio that offers

effortless and endless music and comedy. Just start
with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs,
genres, composers, or comedians and it will do the
rest.

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio

system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.

Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.

Continued 205
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 206 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.

Rating Icon

Selector Knob AUX Button

Turn to switch to another station. Press to select Pandora®.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Skip Button

Press to turn the audio system on Press to skip a song.
and off.
MENU Button
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press to display the menu items.
Features

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display. Preset Button (5)
Press to select Bookmark Artist.
Preset Button (1)
Press to switch the mode between Preset Button (4)
pause and resume. Press to select Bookmark Track.
Preset Button (2) Preset Button (3)
Press to select Dislike. Press to select Like.

206
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 207 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ Pandora® Menu 1Pandora® Menu

Available operating functions vary on software
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio versions. Some functions may not be available on the
system. The available items are: vehicle's audio system.
• Like (Thumbs-up)
• Dislike (Thumbs-down) If there is a problem, you may see an error message
• Station List on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 285
• Change Source
• Bookmark Track Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
• Bookmark Artist on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
• Play/Pause has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
■ Operating a menu item

Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select an item, then press .

207
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 208 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185

Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.
Features

AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system Seek/Skip Buttons
on and off. Press or to change files.
Turn to adjust the volume. Press and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
BACK Button MENU Button
Press to go back to the Press to display the menu items.
previous display.
Selector Knob
Turn to change folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
208 * Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 209 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List 1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
1. Press the MENU button. 2 General Information on the Audio System
2. Rotate to select Music Search, then P. 288
press .
3. Rotate to select a folder. Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
4. Press to change the display to a list of The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
files in that folder. skips to the next file.
5. Rotate to select a file, then press .
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
Folder Selection 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 284

Features
File Selection

Continued 209
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 210 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. Scan
1. Press the MENU button. Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/ first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
Repeat, then press .
in the current folder.
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random/Repeat Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
is selected. in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Features

■ To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

210
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 211 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
phone. Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. For a list of compatible phones:
2 Phone Setup P. 347 • U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
Audio/
Information Bluetooth Indicator 528-7876.
Screen Appears when your
phone is connected In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
to HFL. device functions while driving.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,

there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

Features
VOL/ AUX Button
(Power/volume) Press to select
Knob Bluetooth® Audio.
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Skip Buttons
Turn to adjust the
Press or
volume.
to change files.

Preset Button (1)

Press to resume
playing a file.

Preset Button (2) MENU Button

Press to pause a Press to display
playing file. the menu items.

Continued 211
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 212 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
connected to HFL. instructions.
2. Press the AUX button.
The pause function may not be available on some
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- phones.
compatible phone, which is not compatible
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be jack, you may need to press the AUX button
connected. repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

■ To pause or resume a file from your phone.
Features

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .

212
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 213 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with two displays 1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Audio Menu Items
(HOME) (Day/Night) : Select to go to the home screen. 2 Station List P. 238, 240
Icon Button 2 Switching the Display P. 216 2 Music Search P. 250, 253, 263, 266
: Select to display any mode. 2 Scan P. 239, 248, 251, 264
2 Play Mode P. 251, 254, 264
The available modes include Sound, View
Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes.
: Select to go back to the previous display
when it is displayed.

Features
(BACK) Icon (MENU) Icon

(Day/Night) Button: Press to change the

audio/information touch screen brightness.
Press once and select (- or (+ to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you press , the mode
switches among the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.

213
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 214 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status, trip computer, compass *, Turn by Turn, and clock/
wallpaper.

■ Switching the Display

Press the (display) button to change the display.

(Display)
Button

Audio/Information
Screen
Turn by Turn/Trip
Features

Computer/Audio

Clock

Compass */Trip Audio

Computer/Audio

Wallpaper

Trip Computer/
Audio

214 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 215 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Turn by Turn
Displays the Turn by Turn screen.

■ Trip computer
Displays the range and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the
average fuel economy from your last trip.

■ Audio
Displays the current audio information.

■ Clock/Wallpaper
Displays a clock screen.

Features
215
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 216 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

Audio/Information Touch Screen

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display

Home Screen
Models without
navigation system
Features

Models with
navigation system

Select to go to the home screen.

Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Aha,
Smartphone connection, or App List.

■ Phone
Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 371

216 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 217 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ Info
Displays Trip Computer. To see all available information, Trip Computer, Voice
Info, or System/Device Information, select on the Info Menu screen.

Trip Computer:
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The
information is stored every time you reset Trip A.
To delete the history manually, select Delete History on the History of Trip A
tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.
Voice Info: Displays the all commands list.

Features
System/Device Information:
• System Info: Displays the device number and the vehicle identification number
(VIN).
• USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.

■ Audio
Displays the current audio information.

■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 314

■ Navigation *
Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

* Not available on all models Continued 217

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 218 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ HondaLink
Connects with your smartphone*1 to play personalized music, information, and
social media streams.
2 HondaLink® P. 267

■ Aha
Displays the AhaTM screen.
2 Playing AhaTM P. 261

■ Smartphone connection
Displays the Apple CarPlay® or Android AutoTM screen.
2 Apple CarPlay® P. 274
Features

2 Android AutoTM P. 278

■ App List
Adds or removes App or Widget on the home screen.
2 Home Screen P. 222

*1: Available on specific phones only. Check handsfreelink.honda.com for U.S. and
www.handsfreelink.ca for Canada for compatible phones and hondalink.com for U.S. and
honda.ca/hondalink for Canada for feature details.

218
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 219 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout

1. Select .
2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
4. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.

Features
Continued 219
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 220 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup 1Wallpaper Setup

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information touch in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
screen. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
• The file name must be fewer than 256 characters.
■ Import wallpaper • The file format of the image that can be imported
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
• The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
drive.
• The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the
port. image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185 the extra area appearing in black.
2. Select Settings. • If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
3. Select Clock/Info. the No files detected message appears.
Features

4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open

the Wallpaper tab.
5. Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Select Start Import to save the data.
u The display will return to the wallpaper
list.

220 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 221 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ Select wallpaper 1Wallpaper Setup

1. Select Settings. When the clock or wallpaper is selected on the audio/
2. Select Clock/Info. information screen, you can see a preview at full-size
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 191
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a desired wallpaper. From the pop-up menu, select Preview.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
Audio/information touch screen
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

■ To view wallpaper once it is set

Features
Press the (display) button to change the audio/information screen until the
wallpaper is displayed.
2 Switching the Display P. 214

■ Delete wallpaper Audio/information screen

1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock/Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Delete. To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or
select .
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
6. Select Yes to delete completely. When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All,
then Yes.
Continued 221
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 222 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ Home Screen 1Home Screen

The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add
■ To change to a next screen any more pages.

Swipe

Icon Icon Current page position

Features

Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

222
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 223 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ To use apps or widgets 1To use apps or widgets

1. Select . Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that
2. Select . app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen.
3. Select App List.
u The APPS screen appears. Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this
occurs, you need to reset the system.
4. Select the app or widget you want to use.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 337

Preinstall app list: If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all
• Browser: Displays the web browser utilized the settings to their factory default.
by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 337
• Calculator: Displays Calculator.
• Downloads: Displays the data downloaded In case those apps still do not startup normally even
after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

Features
from the web browser and so on.
• Install USB: Installs and updates apps There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in
stored in the USB flash drive. the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen
• Search: Displays various retrieval screens. will return to before the browser startup.
• Settings: Displays the Android setting
screen. You can delete user installed apps by the following
App List procedure.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Detail Information.
6. Select an App that you want to delete.
7. Select Delete.

Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.

Continued 223
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 224 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ To add app or widget icons on the home screen

App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Select .
2. Select .
3. Select and hold empty space on the home
screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Add App or Add Widget.
u The APPS screen appears.
Features

Select and hold.

224
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 225 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you

want to add.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
Select and hold. it to be.
7. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.

Features
Drag and drop.

Continued 225
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 226 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ To move icons on the home screen 1To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen. You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio,
1. Select and hold an icon. Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Aha,
u The screen switches to the customization Smartphone connection, and App List icons in the
screen. same manner.
2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
3. Select OK.
Select and hold. u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Features

Drag and drop.

226 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 227 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ To remove icons from the home screen 1To remove icons from the home screen
You can delete the icons on the home screen. You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio,
1. Select and hold an icon. Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Aha,
u The screen switches to the customization Smartphone connection, and App List icons.
screen.
Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
icon on the home screen.
to the trash icon.
u The icon is removed from the home
Select and hold.
screen.
3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.

Features
Drag and drop to
trash icon.

* Not available on all models Continued 227

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 228 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ Status Area
1. Swipe the upper area of the screen.
u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details.
3. Select or swipe up the icon to close
Swipe the area.
Features

Status Area Icon

228
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 229 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

■ Closing Apps 1Closing Apps

If you leave the apps used open in the background,
You can close specific apps running in the background on the system. some apps may stop operating properly next time
1. Select and hold . using them.
2. Select an app you want to close. If this happens close unused apps.
3. Select Stop.
u The display will return to the app list. To close all apps on the system, select Stop All, then
Yes.

You cannot close the HondaLink®, AhaTM and

Garmin * apps.

Features
* Not available on all models 229
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 230 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

1. Select . 1Adjusting the Sound
2. Select Audio. The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
3. Select . SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
4. Select Sound. speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Select a tab from the following choices:
You can also adjust the sound with the following
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, procedure.
Subwoofer, Speed Volume Compensation 1. Select .
(SVC). 2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Sound.
Features

230
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 231 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information touch
screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness 1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level
1. Select . settings in the same manner.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Display Settings.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.

Features
■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Background Color.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.

Continued 231
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 232 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

■ Selecting an Audio Source 1Selecting an Audio Source

If you startup preinstalled audio apps, is
Select the source icon. displayed on the upper portion of the screen.
Source Select Screen These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the
source select screen.
You can startup those audio apps from .

When you are using the AhaTM screen and you want
to select another source, select SOURCE on the
upper left of the screen. The source select screen will
appear. Select the source you want.
Source List Icons

Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the
Features

audio source.

■ Limitations for Manual Operation

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

232
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 233 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. 1Voice Control Operation
The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks
steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling. what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.

■ Voice Recognition 1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are noises from the front passenger’s side.
using.
• Close the windows and moonroof *.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone

Features
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

* Not available on all models Continued 233

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 234 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Phone Call ■ Audio*1

■ Voice Portal Screen This can be only used when the phone is When the system recognizes the Audio
connected. When the system recognizes the command, the screen will change to the
Phone call command, the screen will audio voice recognition screen.
change to the voice recognition screen for • Audio On
the phone commands. • Audio Off
• Dial by number • Radio FM
• Call history • Radio AM
• Redial • Radio SXM
• Call <Your Contact Name> • DISC
• Call <Phone Number> • Pandora *
When the (Talk) button is pressed, Phone Call commands are not available if • iPod
available voice commands appear on the
Features

Apple CarPlay® or Android AutoTM is in use. • USB

screen. • Other Sources
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice ■ Music Search*1 Pandora® * cannot be used with Android
Help” after the beep or select Voice Help. This can be only used when the iPod or USB AutoTM.
device is connected.
You can also see the list of commands by ■ Navigation*1
selecting Info, , and Voice Info. The screen changes to the navigation voice
recognition screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

■ Voice Settings
The screen changes to the Voice Recog tab
on the System settings screen.

■ Trip Computer
The screen changes to the trip computer
*1: Models with navigation system screen.

234 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 235 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Voice Help • Radio SXM preset <1-12>

You can see a list of the available
■ Phone Commands
commands on the screen. The system accepts these commands on the ■ DISC Commands
• Useful Commands dedicated screen for the voice recognition • DISC play
• Phone Commands of the phone. • DISC play track <1-30>
• Audio Commands • Call by Number
• On Screen Commands • Call by Name ■ Pandora Commands *
• Music Search Commands • Call <Phone Number> • Pandora play
• General Commands • Call <Your Contact Name>
• Climate Control Commands ■ iPod Commands
• All Commands ■ Audio Commands*1 • iPod play
• Voice Settings • iPod play track <1-30>
The system accepts these commands on the

Features
• Getting Started • Music Search
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
• What album is this?
of the audio.
■ Useful Commands • What am I listening to?

The system accepts these commands on the ■ Radio FM Commands

■ USB Commands
voice portal top screen. • Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
• USB play
• Call <Phone Number> • Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
• USB play track <1-30>
• Call <Your Contact Name> FM
• Music Search
• What time is it? • Radio FM preset <1-12>
• What album is this?
• What is today’s date? • What am I listening to?
■ Radio AM Commands
• Radio tune to <530-1710> AM
■ Bluetooth® audio Commands
• Radio AM preset <1-6>
• Bluetooth® audio play
NOTE:
■ Radio SXM Commands
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
• SXM channel <1-999>
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
• SXM channel <station name>
*1: Models with navigation system devices.
* Not available on all models Continued 235
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 236 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Play Commands
■ On Screen Commands • Play artist <Name>
■ Climate Control Commands*1
When On Screen Commands is selected, • Play track/song <Name> • Climate Control on
the explanation screen is displayed. • Play album <Name> • Climate Control off
• Play genre/category <Name> • Fan Speed <1-7>
■ Music Search Commands*1 • Play playlist <Name> • Temperature max heat
• Play composer <Name> • Temperature max cool
The system accepts these commands on the • Temperature <57-87> degrees
Music Search screen.
■ List Commands • Defrost on
• List artist <Name> • Defrost off
■ Using Song By Voice • Air conditioner on
• List album <Name>
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you • Air conditioner off
• List genre/category <Name>
to select music from your iPod or USB device • More
Features

• List playlist <Name>

using Voice Commands. To activate this • Climate control automatic
• List composer <Name>
mode, you must push the talk button and • Vent
say: “Music search”. • Dash and floor
■ General Commands • Fan speed up
■ Song By Voice Commands • What time is it? • Fan speed down
• What am I listening to? • What is today’s date? • Floor vents
• Who am I listening to? • Floor and defrost
• Who is this? • Temperature up
• What’s playing? • Temperature down
• Who’s playing?
• What album is this?

*1: Models with navigation system

236
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 237 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

Audio/Information Screen

(Power) Button Audio/Information Touch Screen

Press to turn the audio system on
and off. Open/Close Icon*1

Features
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items. Seek Icons
Select or to search up
(BACK) Icon and down the selected band for a
Select to go back to the previous station with a strong signal.
display.
Scan Icon
Select to scan each station with a strong Preset Icons
signal. Tune the radio frequency for preset memory.
Tune Icons Select and hold the preset icon to store that
station. Select to display preset 7 onwards.
Select or to tune the radio
frequency.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Continued 237
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 238 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Preset Memory 1Playing AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
To store a station: stereo FM broadcasts.
1. Tune to the selected station. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Switching the Audio Mode
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure. Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 188
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab. You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. preset memory.

■ Station List Models with HD RadioTM

Features

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license

Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and
2. Select the Station List tab. “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
3. Select the station.

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select Refresh.

238
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 239 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Cancel or .

Models with HD RadioTM

■ HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select .
2. Select HD Radio Subchannel.
3. Select the channel number.

Features
Continued 239
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 240 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS) 1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station. automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
■ To find an RDS station from Station List signals of that station become weak, the display
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. changes from the station name to the frequency.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select the station.

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the Station List tab.
Features

3. Select Refresh.

■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select .
2. Select View Radio Text.

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

To turn off scan, select Cancel or .

240
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 241 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

Playing SiriusXM® Radio *

Audio/Information Screen

Channel Icons
Select or for the previous
or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10
(Power) Button Album Art channels at a time.
Press to turn the audio system
on and off. Audio/Information Touch Screen

Features
Station Art
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
Open/Close Icon*1
(MENU) Icon Displays/hides the detailed
Select to display the menu items. information.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Scan Icon Skip Icons Preset Icons
Select to scan each channel. Select or to change Tune the radio frequency for preset
section in the channel. memory. Select and hold the preset
Category Icons icon to store that station. Select
Select or to display and select a Select and hold to move rapidly
to display preset 7 onwards.
SiriusXM® Radio category. within the section.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

* Not available on all models Continued 241

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 242 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ To Change the Tune Mode 1Playing SiriusXM® Radio *

In the channel mode, all available channels are
1. Select . selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
2. Select Tune Mode. channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.

SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,

which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.
Features

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 188

Tune Start:
When you change to a preset channel, a song being
played on that channel restarts from the beginning
with this function. This can be turned on or off from
the Audio settings screen.
2 Customized Features P. 314

242 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 243 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Preset Memory 1Playing SiriusXM® Radio *

You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset
To store a channel: memory.
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select to hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
3. Select Replace.

You can also store a channel by the following procedure.

1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.

Features
■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel.
u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
5. Select Combine.

* Not available on all models Continued 243

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 244 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Listening to Featured Channels 1Listening to Featured Channels

Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected. displayed.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list.
2. Select the Channel List tab. Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel
3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. list.
u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
4. Select the channel.
Features

244
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 245 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Replay Function 1Replay Function

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned the power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON. You
channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from can go back to the program from that point.
the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the system
records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can You can no longer replay any program once the
power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) as it erases
rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast. memory.
1. Select . You can check how long the program has been
2. Select Playback Position. stored in memory from the audio/information touch
screen.
3. Move the gauge to the position you want to replay.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will
To play or pause on playback mode: automatically start deleting the oldest data.
1. Select .

Features
Audio/Information Touch Screen
2. Select Play/Pause.
(A)
■ Returning to real-time broadcast
1. Select .
2. Select Play Live Broadcast. (B)

(C)

(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is

behind the real-time broadcast
(B): Replayed segment
(C): Length stored in memory

Continued 245
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 246 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Live Sports Alert 1Live Sports Alert

The sports alert function at SiriusXM® mode only.
While listening to SiriusXM® Radio, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from
your favorite teams.

■ To set up a favorite team 1To set up a favorite team

1. Select . Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.
2. Select Settings. Selecting On(one time) from the customize settings
3. Select Audio. disables the alert feature next time you set the power
4. Select the SXM tab. mode to ON.
2 Customized Features P. 314
5. Select SportsFlash Setup (Favorite
Team). You can also set up a favorite team by the following
6. Select a team.
Features

procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select .
3. Select Setting.
■ To set up an alert message 4. Select the SXM tab.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab.
5. Select SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt).
6. Select On(one time) or On(continue).

246
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 247 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ To set up an alert beep 1To set up an alert beep

1. Select . You can also set up an alert beep by the following
2. Select Settings. procedure.
3. Select Audio. 1. Select Audio.
4. Select the SXM tab. 2. Select .
3. Select Setting.
5. Select SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep).
4. Select the SXM tab.
6. Select On.

■ Traffic and Weather Information 1Traffic and Weather Information

You can receive traffic and weather information. The traffic and weather information function in
1. Select . SiriusXM® mode only.
2. Select Settings.
You can also set up the traffic and weather

Features
3. Select Audio.
information by the following procedure.
4. Select the SXM tab.
1. Select Audio.
5. Select Traffic & Weather Setup. 2. Select .
6. Select the region. 3. Select Setting.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unset. 4. Select the SXM tab.

Continued 247
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 248 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Scan 1Scan
The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®.
1. Select Scan.
2. Select Scan Channels. The “Featured Channels” function is based on
u To only scan preset stations, select Scan Songs in Presets. Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®.

TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered

To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
Features

248
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 249 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA,
or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Touch Screen

(Power) Button
CD Slot
Press to turn the audio system
on and off. Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
(Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.

Features
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
Open/Close Icon*2
(MENU) Icon Displays/hides the detailed
Select to display the menu items. information.

(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous Track Icons
display. Select or to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Folder Icons Select and hold to move rapidly
Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the within a track.
beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Continued 249
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 250 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/ 1Playing a CD
AAC) NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
1. Select and select Music Search. cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following

circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
Folder Selection • When you change the audio mode to CD.
Features

2. Select a folder.
• When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

Track Selection
3. Select a track.

250
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 251 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file. Scan
■ Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
1. Select . sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
2. Select Scan. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
3. Select a play mode. tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
■ Random/Repeat Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files

Features
in the current folder in random order.
Select a play mode.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.

■ To turn off a play mode

Select the mode you want to turn off.

251
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 252 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185

Audio/Information Screen

(Power) Button
Features

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Cover Art
Audio/Information Touch Screen
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
Open/Close Icon*1
(MENU) Icon Displays/hides the detailed
Select to display the menu items. information.
(BACK) Icon Song Icons
Select to go back to the previous Select or to change songs.
display.
Select and hold to move rapidly
Play/Pause Icon within a song.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

252 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 253 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List 1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
1. Select and select Music Search. versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information touch screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 284

If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod

while the phone is connected to the audio system,
you may no longer be able to operate the same app
Category Selection on the audio/information touch screen.
2. Select the items on that menu. Reconnect the device if necessary.

Features
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay®, the
iPod/USB source is unavailable and audio files on the
phone can only be played within Apple CarPlay®.

Item Selection

Continued 253
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 254 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
Select a play mode. selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Features

■ To turn off a play mode

Select the mode you want to turn off.

254
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 255 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Models with navigation system

Song By Voice TM
(SBV) 1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice Setting options:
commands. • On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands
are available.
■ To enable SBV • Off: Disable the feature.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Song by Voice.
6. Select On or Off.

Features
Continued 255
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 256 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Searching for music using SBV 1Searching for music using SBV
1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On. Song By VoiceTM Commands List
2. Press the (Talk) button and say “Music 2 Song By Voice Commands P. 236
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
USB flash drive and iPod. NOTE:
Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks
3. Press the button and say a command.
stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.
u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
desired song to start playing. words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
playing songs by that artist. 2 Phonetic Modification P. 257
4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back)
SBV is not available when using Apple CarPlay®. Use
Features

button on the steering wheel. The selected

Siri® Eyes Free instead.
song continues playing.

Once you have canceled this mode, you need

to press the button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.

256
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 257 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Phonetic Modification 1Phonetic Modification

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification is grayed
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV out when Song By Voice is set to Off.
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod. You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
1. Select . items.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select New Modification.
7. Select USB or iPod.

Features
Continued 257
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 258 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist).

u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
9. Select an entry to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
u To listen to the current phonetic
modification, select Play.
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, select Delete.
10.Select Modify.
11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to
use (e.g., ”Artist A”) when prompted.
Features

12.Select OK.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the (Talk) button
and use the voice command “Play ‘Artist
A’” to play songs by the artist “No
Name.”

258
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 259 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® *

U.S. models
Playing Pandora® * 1Playing Pandora® *
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
compatible smartphone. dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using is only available in certain countries.
Visit the Pandora website for more information.
your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185 feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
Audio/Information Screen
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
Cover Art must first be installed on your phone. Visit
Audio/Information Touch Screen www.pandora.com. for more information.

Features
(Power) Button Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
Press to turn the audio and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of
system on and off. one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
VOL (Volume) Icons that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
Select to adjust the hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
volume. Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

(MENU) Icon If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio

Select to display the system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
menu items. Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
Like/Dislike Icons system is selected.
(BACK) Icon
Select to evaluate a song.
Select to go back to the If your phone is connected to Android AutoTM,
Play/Pause Icon
previous display.
Select to resume or play a song. Pandora® is only available through the Android
Station Up/Down Icons Skip Icon AutoTM interface.
Select to change a station. Select to skip a song. Visit the Android AutoTM website to check
compatibility.

* Not available on all models Continued 259

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 260 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® *

■ Pandora® Menu 1Pandora® Menu

Available operating functions vary on software
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio versions. Some functions may not be available on the
system. The available items are: vehicle’s audio system.
• Bookmark
• Station List If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information touch screen.
• New Station
2 Pandora® P. 285
• Sound
• Setting Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
■ Operating a menu item has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
1. Select . the current track will continue to play.
2. Select an item.
Features

To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,

select Station List, and then select a new station. It
also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen.

260
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 261 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AhaTM

Playing AhaTM
AhaTM can be displayed and operated on the audio/information touch screen when 1Playing AhaTM
your smartphone is connected to the audio system by Wi-Fi or through Bluetooth® AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that
with the HondaLink® app downloaded to your smartphone. organizes your favorite web content into live radio
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 272 stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
2 HondaLink® P. 267 location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.

Available operating functions vary on software

Audio/Information Screen versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.

The menu items vary depending on the station you

selected.
Audio/Information Touch Screen

Features
(Power) Button You must have a previously set up AhaTM account
Press to turn the audio prior to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
system on and off. www.aharadio.com for more information.

You want to select another source, select AUDIO on

the upper left of the screen. The source select screen
will appear. Select the source you want.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the When Apple CarPlay® or Android AutoTM is
volume. connected to the audio system, AhaTM can be
accessed even without a Wi-Fi connection.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the
previous display.

261
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 262 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185

Audio/Information Screen

(Power) Button
Features

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Audio/Information Touch Screen

VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
Open/Close Icon*2
(MENU) Icon Displays/hides the detailed
Select to display the menu items. information.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous Track Icons
display. Select or to change files.
Folder Icons Select and hold to move rapidly
Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip within a track.
to the beginning of the previous folder.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

262 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 263 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List 1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
1. Select and select Music Search. 2 General Information on the Audio System
2. Select Music. P. 288

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information touch screen.
Folder Selection 3. Select a folder. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 284

Features
Select Switch USB Device in the Audio menu
screen to switch to another USB device.

Track Selection 4. Select a track.

Continued 263
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 264 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. Scan
■ Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
1. Select . first file in each of the main folders.
2. Select Scan. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
3. Select a play mode. in the current folder.

Random/Repeat
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
■ Random/Repeat Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Features

Select a play mode.

■ To turn off a play mode

Select the mode you want to turn off.

264
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 265 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
phone. Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s audio capabilities are compatible.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. To check if your phone is compatible, visit
2 Phone Setup P. 380 http://www.handsfreelink.com/Honda/.

It may be illegal to perform some data device

functions while driving.
Bluetooth Indicator
Audio/Information
Appears when your
Screen Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
phone is connected
to HFL. When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
(Power) Button Audio/Information
Touch Screen

Features
Press to turn the The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be
audio system on and different.
off.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
VOL (Volume) Icons there may be a delay before the system begins to
Select to adjust the play.
Open/Close Icon*1
volume.
Displays/hides the
(MENU) Icon In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
detailed
Select to display the may not appear correctly.
information.
menu items.
Some functions may not be available on some
(BACK) Icon Track Icons devices.
Select to go back to Select or
the previous display. to change tracks. If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay®
Group Icons or Android AutoTM, Bluetooth® Audio from that
Play Icon Select or to phone is unavailable. However, you can have a
Pause Icon change group. second previously paired phone stream Bluetooth®
Audio by selecting Connect from Bluetooth
*1:Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not Device List.
be displayed. 2 Phone Setup P. 380
Continued 265
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 266 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
connected to the system. instructions.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode. Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
You can change the connected phone in the
compatible phone, which is not compatible Bluetooth® settings on the Audio menu screen by
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be the following procedure.
connected. 1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
■ To pause or resume a file
Features

Select the play icon or pause icon.

■ Searching for Music 1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
1. Select . some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
2. Select Music Search.
3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
4. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.

266
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 267 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect 1HondaLink®
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 272 iPhone and Android phones.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
■ HondaLink® Menu subscription package.

When Apple CarPlay® or Android AutoTM is

connected to the audio system, HondaLink® can be
accessed even without a Wi-Fi connection.

Features
■ Places *
Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to
the found locations via the navigation.

■ Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

■ Help & Support

Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service
center.

* Not available on all models Continued 267

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 268 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ Messages from Honda

Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

■ Weather
Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can
change the ZIP Code at any time.

■ To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service

Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.

■ To enable the HondaLink® service

1. Select .
Features

2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock/Info.
4. Select the HondaLink tab.
5. Select Diagnostic & Location Data.
6. Select On.

You need to allow the consent of the location

service to enable the HondaLink® service.

Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Prompt

shows again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

268
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 269 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ To link with HondaLink®

You can see the Connection Guide screen
after launching HondaLink®. If you do not
need this guide, select check-box and select
OK.

Features
Continued 269
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 270 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips

You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.
1. A message appears and notifies you of a
new message on the header area.
u When the message is received, a
notification ring can be heard.

Message
Icon
(yellow)
Features

2. A message icon is continuously displayed in

the header area until the new message is
read.

270
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 271 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to

see the messages.

4. Select a new message to open.

Features
271
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 272 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the display audio to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites
or use online services on the audio/information touch screen. If your phone has cell
hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following
steps to setup.

■ Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time) 1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
You cannot go through the setting procedure while a
1. Select . vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the
2. Select Settings. Wi-Fi connection.
3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi.
4. Select the Wi-Fi tab. Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On. smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
6. Select Wi-Fi Network List.
Features

u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
in access point (tethering) mode. has Wi-Fi connectivity.
u Select the phone you want to connect to
the system. You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
u If you do not find the phone you want to off with the icon on Wi-Fi Network List.
connect in the list, select Scan. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed
on this screen.
7. Select Connect.
u Enter a password for your phone, and
select OK.
u When the connection is successful, the
icon is displayed on the list.
8. Select to go back to the home screen.

272
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 273 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

■ Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made) 1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
iPhone users
Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode. You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-
Fi connection again after you boot your phone.

Features
273
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 274 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®

Apple CarPlay®
If you connect an Apple CarPlay®-compatible iPhone to the system via USB, you can 1Apple CarPlay®
use the audio/information touch screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages. are compatible with Apple CarPlay®.
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay® and when launching any compatible
apps.

To use Apple CarPlay®, connect the USB cable to the

front USB port. The USB port located in the center
console storage will not enable Apple CarPlay®
operation.
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185
Features

To directly access the Apple CarPlay® phone function,

select Phone on the home screen. While connected
to Apple CarPlay®, calls are only made through Apple
CarPlay®. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth®
HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlay® OFF or detach
the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay® P. 276

When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay®, it

is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay® is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 380

For details on countries and regions where Apple

CarPlay® is available, as well as information
pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

274 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 275 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®

■ Apple CarPlay® Menu 1Apple CarPlay®

Apple CarPlay® Operating Requirements &
Home Screen Apple CarPlay® Menu Limitations
Apple CarPlay® requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,

Go back to
the home and other technology integral to providing Apple
screen. CarPlay® functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
Apple CarPlay® Icon Go back to the Apple CarPlay® menu screen. cessation of Apple CarPlay® functionality and
services. Honda cannot and does not provide any
■ Phone warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay®

Features
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail. performance or functionality.

■ Messages It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are

compatible with Apple CarPlay®. Refer to the Apple
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
homepage for information on compatible apps.

■ Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.

■ Maps
Display Apple CarPlay® map and use the navigation function just as you would on
your iPhone.

Models with navigation system

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay® map) can
give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
Continued 275
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 276 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®

■ Setting Up Apple CarPlay® 1Setting Up Apple CarPlay®

You can also use the method below to set up Apple
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via USB, use the following CarPlay®:
procedure to set up Apple CarPlay®. Use of Apple CarPlay® will result in the Select HOME Settings Smartphone Apple
transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, CarPlay
and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay® experience. You will need
to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information touch screen. Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay® is
■ Enabling Apple CarPlay® governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
• Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt Apple’s Privacy Policy.
shows again next time.)
• Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Features

• Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under

the Smartphone settings menu.

276
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 277 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay®

■ Operating Apple CarPlay® with Siri® Eyes Free 1Operating Apple CarPlay® with Siri® Eyes Free
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri® Eyes Free. Siri® Eyes Free:
• What movies are playing today?
• Call dad at work.
• What song is this?
• How’s the weather tomorrow?
• Read my latest email.
• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.

For more information, please visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri.

Features
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to activate Siri® Eyes Free.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
Press again to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.

277
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 278 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Android AutoTM
When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via USB, Android 1Android AutoTM
AutoTM is automatically initiated. When connected via Android AutoTM, you can use To use Android AutoTM, you need to download the
the audio/information touch screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Android AutoTM app from Google Play to your
Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android AutoTM, smartphone.
a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are
while safely parked before using Android AutoTM.
compatible with Android AutoTM. Bluetooth A2DP
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185
cannot be used with Android AutoTM phone.
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 280
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android AutoTM and when launching any
compatible apps.

To use Android AutoTM, connect the USB cable to the

Features

front USB port. The USB port in the center console

storage will not enable Android AutoTM operation.
2 USB Port(s *) P. 185

To directly access the Android AutoTM phone

function, select Phone on the home screen.
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 280

When your Android phone is connected to Android

AutoTM, it is not possible to use Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android AutoTM is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 380

278 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 279 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

■ Android AutoTM Menu 1Android AutoTM

For details on countries and regions where Android
6 AutoTM is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Android AutoTM homepage.

Android AutoTM Operating Requirements &

Limitations
Android AutoTM requires a compatible Android phone
: Go back to with an active cellular connection and data plan.
the home screen. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Android AutoTM Icon Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,

and other technology integral to providing Android
a Maps (Navigation) AutoTM functionality, as well as new or revised

Features
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android AutoTM functionality and
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
services. Honda cannot and does not provide any
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other warranty or guarantee of future Android AutoTM
inputs. performance or functionality.

Models with navigation system It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Android AutoTM. Refer to the
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android AutoTM) can give
Android AutoTM homepage for information on
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior compatible apps.
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your
destination.

Continued 279
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 280 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

b Phone (Communication)
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
c Google Now (Home screen)
Display useful information organized by Android AutoTM into simple cards that
appear just when they’re needed.
d Music and audio
Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android AutoTM. To
switch between music apps, press this icon.
e Go back to the Home screen
f Voice
Operate Android AutoTM with your voice.

■ Auto Pairing Connection

Features

1Enabling Android AutoTM

Only initialize Android AutoTM when you are safely
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via USB, Android AutoTM is parked. When Android AutoTM first detects your
automatically initiated. phone, you will need to set up your phone so that
auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction
■ Enabling Android AutoTM manual that came with your phone.
• Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt
You can use the method below to change Android
shows again next time.)
AutoTM settings after you have completed the initial
• Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt setup:
does not show again.) Select HOME Settings Smartphone Android
• Cancel: Does not allow this consent. Auto

You may change the consent settings under Use of user and vehicle information
the Smartphone settings menu. The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android AutoTM is
governed by Google’s Privacy Policy.

280
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 281 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

■ Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition 1Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
Press and hold the talk button to operate Android AutoTM with your voice. voice recognition:
• Reply to text.
• Call my wife.
• Navigate to Honda.
• Play my music.
• Send a text message to my wife.
• Call flower shop.

For more information, please refer to the Android

AutoTM homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function

Features
(Talk) button: by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of
Press and hold to operate Android AutoTM with your voice. the screen.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

(Hang-up/back) button:
Press to deactivate voice recognition.

281
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 282 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free

Siri® Eyes Free

You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your 1Siri® Eyes Free
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.

We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri®

Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

■ Using Siri® Eyes Free 1Using Siri® Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Hang-up/back) Button
Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.
Features

Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Siri® Eyes
Free
While in Siri® Eyes Free:
(Talk) Button The display remains the same. No
Press and hold until the display feedback or commands appear.
changes as shown.

282
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 283 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Audio Error Messages

CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message Cause Solution
● Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
Unplayable File Track/file format not supported
plays automatically.

Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s ● Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
Manual error message is cleared.
Push Eject*1 ● Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
Bad Disc Mechanical error 2 Protecting CDs P. 290
Please check Owner’s ● If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out

Features
Manual the disc.
Please push eject button*2 ● Insert a different disc.
Mecha Error If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
● If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
Bad Disc contact a dealer.
Please Check Owner’s Servo error Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Manual
● Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
Check Disc Disc error
2 Protecting CDs P. 290

● Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
Heat Error High temperature
the error message is cleared.
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays

283
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 284 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive

iPod/USB Flash Drive

If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution

Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB Error USB adapter unit.

Incompatible USB Device

Please Check Owner’s
Manual*1 Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
The connected USB device off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual*2
Features

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
Unsupported Version update the iPod software to the newer version.

Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
Unplayable File appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
iPod
Appears when the iPod is empty.
USB flash drive
No Data Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
iPod and USB flash drive
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected,
Unsupported reconnect the device.
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays
284
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 285 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

U.S. models
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Models with one display

Error Message Solution

Incompatible USB Device Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the
Please Check Owner’s Manual audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

There is no station list in the device. Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a
Please add the station list to your device. station.
Music licenses force us to limit the number of Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the predetermined
tracks you may skip each hour. number of times in an hour.

Features
Unable to save rating.
Unable to save bookmark Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.
or
Unable to skip

No data Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and
reconnect the device.

PANDORA ver unsupport Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest
version.
PANDORA system maintenance Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.

Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped. Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device.
Check your mobile phone
Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again ● Appears when data transfer has failed 10 times. Try again later.
later. ● Appears when condition for transferring data is unstable. Try again later.

Unable to play PANDORA. Music Licensing Appears when Pandora® service is not available in the current area.
restricts play in this area.
Continued 285
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 286 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

Models with two displays

Error Message Solution

To begin listening, select a station from the Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a
Stations list. station.

Unable to rate track. Please try again. Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over the predetermined
Skip limit reached. number of times in an hour.

Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.

Unable to retrieve a track explanation. Please
try again later. Appears when the commanded operation has failed. Try again later.
Unable to create bookmark. Please try again
later.
Features

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and
No Data
reconnect the device.

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest
Pandora App version is not supported
version.

Unable to complete the operation. Please try

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.
again later.
Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped,
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device.
check your mobile phone

Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, Appears when Pandora® app is not installed on your device. Install Pandora® app to
check your mobile phone the your device.

286
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 287 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps

Models with two displays

Android/Apps
If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message*1 Solution

Unfortunately, **** has

Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.
stopped.

App is not responding.

Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep
**** is not responding.
waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data
Would you like to close it?
Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 337

Features
*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error
occurs.

287
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 288 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

General Information on the Audio System

SiriusXM® Radio Service *
■ Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio 1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in • US: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or 1-
the screen, select Channel 0. 800-852-9696
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to • Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca, or
subscribe. 1-877-209-0079

■ Receiving SiriusXM® Radio 1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio

The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the SOURCE button on the steering wheel, therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
or through the audio/information touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
good reception. mountains the farther north you travel from the
Features

equator.

■ SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages You may experience reception problems under the
Channel Not Subscribed: following circumstances:
You are not subscribed to the channel selected. • In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
Subscription Updated: • In tunnels
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network. • On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
Channel Not Available: • Large items carried on the roof rack
No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Antenna Disconnected:
The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer.

288 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 289 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs

Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. 1Recommended CDs
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs. under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

■ CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files

• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.

Features
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

Continued 289
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 290 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

■ Protecting CDs 1Protecting CDs

Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: NOTICE
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. and damage the audio unit.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. Examples:
● Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. excessively thick CDs
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
Bubbled/ With Label/ Using
Wrinkled Sticker Printer Label
Kit
Features

Sealed With Plastic Ring

● Damaged CDs ● Poor quality

CDs

Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked
● Small CDs

3-inch
(8-cm)
CD

290
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 291 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

■ iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility 1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
Model of these devices.
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2005 and 2012*1
iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) released between 2005 and 2010*2
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5*1
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s*2

Features
*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays

■ USB Flash Drives 1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
• A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. order. This order may be different from the order
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible. displayed on your PC or device.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

291
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 292 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay®/Android AutoTM

Models with two displays

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay®/Android AutoTM

■ OWNER'S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY® IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTOTM IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTOTM TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO
Features

WHEN THE ANDROID AUTOTM APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTOTM TERMS
OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE
DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION
(INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE
AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTOTM, INCLUDING
THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING
OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTOTM.

292
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 293 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay®/Android AutoTM

■ DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY® OR ANDROID AUTOTM (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR

Features
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

293
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 294 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses

Models with two displays

About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System, then open the Others tab.
4. Select Detail Information.
5. Select About device.
6. Select Legal information.
7. Select Open source licenses.
Features

294
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 295 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Customized Features

Models with one display 1Customized Features

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features. When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
■ How to customize • Shift to (P .
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the
SETTINGS button, rotate to select a setting item, and press .
Audio/Information Screen 1How to customize
To customize other features, rotate , and press .
2 List of customizable options P. 302

Features
SETTINGS Button

Continued 295
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 296 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ Customization flow
Display Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Press the SETTINGS button.
Beep
Bluetooth Bluetooth On/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
System Voice
Voice Prompt
Settings Recog
Clock Clock/ Clock Type
Wallpaper Wallpaper
Features

Type
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Others Language
Background Color
Header Clock Display
Factory Data Reset

Default

296
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 297 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

TPMS Calibration
Driver
Vehicle Assist
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Settings System
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Setup
ACC Display Speed Unit
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Meter

Features
Language Selection
Setup
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Remote Start System ON/OFF

Driving Position Setup * Memory Position Link

* Not available on all models Continued 297

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 298 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Keyless
Access Door Unlock Mode
Setup Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Lighting
Interior Light Dimming Time
Setup
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Door
Auto Door Lock
Setup
Auto Door Unlock
Features

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Info. Maintenance Reset
Default

298
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 299 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Sound
Source Select Popup
Cover Art*1
Audio
Connect Audio*1
Settings
Bluetooth Device List*1
Default

Clock/
Wallpaper Clock Type

Features
Type Wallpaper
Info
Clock Adjustment
Settings
Clock Format
Default

*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.

Continued 299
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 300 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Connect
Add Bluetooth Device
Phone
Disconnect
Bluetooth
Device
List
Phone
Phone Edit Speed Dial
Settings
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Features

Automatic Phone Sync

Text
Enable Text Message
Messages
New Text Message Alert
Message Auto Reading
Default

300
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 301 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

LaneWatch Show with Turn Signal

Reference Lines
Display Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Default
Camera Rear
Fixed Guideline
Settings Camera
Dynamic Guideline

Features
Default
Default

Continued 301
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 302 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ List of customizable options

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Changes the brightness of the audio/information

Brightness —
screen.
Changes the contrast of the audio/information
Display Contrast —
screen.

Changes the black level of the audio/information

Black Level —
screen.

Selects whether a beeper sounds when you

Features

Beep On*1/Off
System operate the selector knob.
Settings Bluetooth On/Off Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. On*1/Off

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a

Blue- Bluetooth Device List paired phone, and create a security PIN. —
tooth 2 Phone Setup P. 347

Changes a pairing code.

Edit Pairing Code Random/Fixed*1
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 349

Voice
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. Beginner*1/Expert
Recog

*1:Default Setting

302
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 303 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Analog/Digital*1/
Clock Type Changes the clock display type.
Small Digital/Off
Clock/
Wallpaper ● Changes the wallpaper type.
Type ● Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. Blank/Galaxy*1/
Wallpaper
Clock ● Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Metallic/Add New
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 193

Adjusts Clock.
Clock Adjustment —
2 Clock P. 118

Features
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H
System
Settings English*1/French/
Language Changes the display language.
Spanish

Changes the background color of the audio/ Blue*1/Amber/Red/

Background Color
Others information screen. Green
Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On*1/Off

Resets all the settings to their factory default.

Factory Data Reset Yes/No
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 313

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Default Yes/No
System Settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

Continued 303
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 304 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel*1/Calibrate

Forward Collision Warning
Changes at which distance the CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short
Distance

Causes the system to beep when the system

ACC Forward Vehicle
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of On/Off*1
Detect Beep
the ACC range.
Vehicle Driver
mph*1/km/h
Settings Assist
Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi- (U.S.)
Features

System ACC Display Speed Unit

information display. mph/km/h*1
Setup
(Canada)

Road Departure Mitigation Changes the setting for the road departure Normal*1/Wide/
Setting mitigation system. Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
On/Off*1
Suspend Beep suspended.

*1:Default Setting

304
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 305 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Changes the displayed language on the multi- English*1/French/
Language Selection
information display. Spanish

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Adjust Outside Temp. Adjusts the temperature reading by a few (U.S.)
Display degrees. -3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
Meter Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A With Refuel/IGN Off/
Setup “Trip A” Reset Timing
and average fuel economy A. Manually Reset*1
Vehicle

Features
Settings Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B With Refuel/IGN Off/
“Trip B” Reset Timing
and average fuel economy B. Manually Reset*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off

Remote Start System ON/

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off
OFF
Driving
Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
Position Memory Position Link On*1/Off
setting.
Setup*

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models Continued 305

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 306 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the Driver Door Only*1/
Door Unlock Mode
driver’s door handle. All Doors
Keyless
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
Access Keyless Access Light Flash On*1/Off
unlock/lock the doors.
Setup
Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab
Keyless Access Beep On*1/Off
either front door handle.

Vehicle 60seconds/
Interior Light Dimming Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
Settings 30seconds*1/
Features

Time on after you close the doors.

15seconds
60seconds/
Lighting
Changes the length of time the exterior lights 30seconds/
Setup Headlight Auto Off Timer
stay on after you close the driver's door. 15seconds*1/
0seconds

Changes the timing for the headlights to come Max/High/Mid*1/

Auto Light Sensitivity
on. Low/Min

*1:Default Setting

306
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 307 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Changes the setting for when the doors With Vehicle Speed*1/
Auto Door Lock
automatically lock. Shift from P/Off
All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens*1/
Changes the setting for when the doors All Doors When
Auto Door Unlock
automatically unlock. Shifted to Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Door Switched Off/Off
Setup

Features
Key And Remote Unlock Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to Driver Door*1/All
Mode unlock on the first push of the remote. Doors
Vehicle
Settings LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
Keyless Lock Answer Back On*1/Off
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock 90seconds/
Security Relock Timer and the security system to set after you unlock 60seconds/
the vehicle without opening any door. 30seconds*1

Mainte-
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
nance Maintenance Reset —
performed the maintenance service.
Info.
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Default Yes/No
Vehicle Settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

Continued 307
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 308 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass and

Treble), -9 ~ C*1 ~ +9
Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
Sound (Fader and Balance),
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 195
Off/Low/Mid*1/High
(SVC)

Selects whether the list of selectable audio

Source Select Popup sources comes on when the AUDIO button is On/Off*1
pressed.
Audio
Features

iPod, USB, or Pandora® * mode

Settings Turns on and off the cover art display. On*1/Off
Cover Art
Bluetooth® Audio or Pandora® * mode Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
—
Connect Audio Audio device to HFL.
Bluetooth® Audio or Pandora® * mode Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
—
Bluetooth Device List to HFL.

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio

Default Yes/No
Settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

308 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 309 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Clock/ Clock Type

Wall-
paper Wallpaper
type See System Settings on P. 302 to P. 303
Info
Settings Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info

Default Yes/No
Settings group as default.

Features
Continued 309
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 310 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
Connect Phone disconnects a paired phone. —
2 Phone Setup P. 347

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

Bluetooth Device List paired phone, or creates a security PIN. —
2 Phone Setup P. 347

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

Edit Speed Dial —
2 Speed Dial P. 358
Phone
Features

Settings Sets calls to automatically transfer from your

Auto Transfer On*1/Off
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Sets whether to automatically answer an
Phone Auto Answer On/Off*1
incoming call after about four seconds.

Fixed/Mobile
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone.
Phone*1/Off

Sets phonebook data to be automatically

Automatic Phone Sync On*1/Off
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

*1:Default Setting

310
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 311 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Enable Text Message Turns the text message function on and off. On*1/Off

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the

New Text Message Alert On/Off*1
screen when HFL receives a new text message.
Text Sets the system to automatically read an
Phone Messages incoming text message.
● On- A text message is always read aloud.
Settings Message Auto Reading On/Off/Auto*1
● Off- A text message is not read aloud.

● Auto- A text message is read aloud only when

Features
driving.
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Default Yes/No
Settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

Continued 311
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 312 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Group

Select whether the LaneWatch display comes on

Show with Turn Signal when you move the turn signal lever to the On*1/Off
passenger side.

Reference Lines Selects whether the reference lines come on the On*1/Off
LaneWatch monitor.

Brightness
Lane- Contrast
Watch
Display Black Level Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings. —
Features

Color
Camera
Tint
Settings
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Yes/No
LaneWatch group as default.

Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the On*1/Off
rear camera monitor.
Rear Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
Dynamic Guideline the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off
Camera

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Yes/No

Camera group as default.

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Yes/No

Camera Settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

312
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 313 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1Defaulting All the Settings
1. Press the SETTINGS button. When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then all settings to default and delete all personal data.
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other, The following settings will be reset:
• Audio preset settings
then Factory Data Reset.
• Phonebook entries
u The confirmation message will appear. • Other display and each item settings.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press to
reset the settings.
4. Rotate to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.

Features
Press to select OK.

313
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 314 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Customized Features

Models with two displays 1Customized Features

Use the audio/information touch screen to customize certain features. When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
■ How to customize • Shift to (P .
With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item.
To customize other features, select Settings.
2 List of customizable options P. 323
Features

Audio/Information
Touch Screen

314
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 315 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ Customization flow
Select . Display Settings Brightness
Display
Contrast
Select Settings. Black Level
Background Color Blue Green
Blue
Amber
Red
Violet

Sound/Beep Guidance Volume

Features
Text Message Volume
System
Voice Recog. Volume
Verbal Reminder *
Beep Volume

Voice Recog Voice Prompt

Voice Recog. Volume
Song by Voice *
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification *
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Automatic Phone Sync
One Press Voice Operation

* Not available on all models Continued 315

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 316 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Clock Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock

Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment *
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Manual Time Zone *
Auto Daylight
Clock Display
System Clock Reset
Features

Others Language
Touch Panel Sensitivity
Detail Information
Factory Data Reset

Default

316 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 317 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

TPMS Calibration

Driver Assist
Forward Collision Warning Distance
System Setup
Head-up Warning
ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep
Vehicle
ACC Display Speed Unit
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Features
Meter Setup Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Driving Position
Memory Position Link
Setup *

* Not available on all models Continued 317

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 318 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Keyless Access
Door Unlock Mode
Setup
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Remote Start System On/Off

Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time

Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Features

Door Setup Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer

Maintenance
Maintenance Reset
Info

Default

318
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 319 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Audio Common Sound

Audio Source Pop-Up
Cover Art
Bluetooth Device List

FM/AM HD Radio Mode *

RDS INFO
SXM * Tune Start
SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt)
SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep)
SportsFlash Setup(Favorite Team)

Features
Traffic & Weather Setup

Default

* Not available on all models Continued 319

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 320 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Clock/Info Clock Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock

Clock Adjustment * Wallpaper
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Manual Time Zone *
Auto Daylight
Clock Display
Clock Reset

HondaLink Diagnostic & Location Data

Features

Other Info Screen Preference

Default

320 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 321 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Phone Phone Bluetooth Device List

Edit Speed Dial
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist
Text/Email Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification
Default

Features
Camera Rear Camera Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default
LaneWatch Show with Turn Signal
Display Time after Turn Signal Off
Reference Line
Default

Continued 321
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 322 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi Bluetooth Bluetooth On/Off Status

Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi On/Off Status
Wi-Fi Network List
Wi-Fi Information

Default
Features

Apple CarPlay/
Smartphone
Android Auto

322
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 323 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ List of customizable options

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Changes the brightness of the audio/information

Brightness —
touch screen.
Display Changes the contrast of the audio/information touch
Contrast —
Settings screen.
Display
Changes the black level of the audio/information
Black Level —
touch screen.

Changes the background color of the audio/ Blue*1/Amber/Red/

Features
Background Color
System information touch screen. Violet/Blue Green
Changes the sound volume.
Guidance Volume 1~6*1~11
Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation system.

Text Message Volume Changes the text/e-mail message reading volume. 1~6*1~11
Sound/
Beep Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6*1~11

Verbal Reminder * Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On*1/Off

Beep Volume Changes the beep volume. Off/1/2*1/3

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models Continued 323

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 324 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On*1/Off

Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6*1~11

Song by Voice * Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off. On*1/Off

Modifies a voice command for music stored in the

Song by Voice Phonetic
system or an iPod/iPhone. —
Modification *
2 Phonetic Modification P. 257
Voice
System
Recog Phonebook Phonetic Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.
—
Features

Modification 2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 389

Sets phonebook and call history data to be

Automatic Phone Sync automatically imported when a phone is paired to On/Off
HFL.
Changes the setting of the touch screen operation
One Press Voice Operation On/Off*1
when using the voice operation.

*1:Default Setting

324 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 325 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Analog/Digital*1/
Clock Changes the clock display type.
Clock/ Small Digital/Off
Wallpaper ● Changes the wallpaper type.
Type Galaxy*1/Metallic/
Wallpaper ● Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Blank
● Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Clock Adjustment * Adjusts clock. —

Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H

Features
System Clock Automatically adjusts the clock when driving through
Auto Time Zone * On*1/Off
different time zones.

Manual Time Zone * Changes the time zone manually. —

Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust the

Auto Daylight clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to cancel this On*1/Off
function.
Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On*1/Off

Clock Reset Resets the clock settings to the factory default. Yes/No

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models Continued 325

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 326 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
English*1/French/
Language Changes the display language.
Spanish

Touch Panel Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Low*1
Others
Detail Information Displays the Android setting items. —
System
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
Factory Data Reset Yes/No
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 337

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System

Default Yes/No
Features

settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

326
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 327 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel*1/Calibrate

Forward Collision Long/Normal*1/
Changes distance the CMBSTM alerts.
Warning Distance Short

Head-up Warning Turns the head-up warning lights on to flash or off. On*1/Off

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a

ACC Pre-Running Car
vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC On/Off*1
Detect Beep
Driver range.
Vehicle

Features
Settings Assist mph*1/km/h
System Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi- (U.S.)
Setup ACC Display Speed Unit
information display. mph/km/h*1
(Canada)

Road Departure Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation Normal*1/Wide/
Mitigation Setting system. Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
On/Off*1
Suspend Beep suspended.

*1:Default Setting

Continued 327
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 328 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Changes the displayed language on the multi- English*1/French/

Language Selection
information display. Spanish

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Adjust Outside Temp. (U.S.)
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
Display -3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
Meter
Vehicle With Refuel/IGN
Setup Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and
“Trip A” Reset Timing Off/Manually
average fuel economy A.
Features

Reset*1

With Refuel/IGN
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and
“Trip B” Reset Timing Off/Manually
average fuel economy B.
Reset*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting

328
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 329 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Driving
Position Memory Position Link Turns the driving position memory system on and off. On*1/Off
Setup *

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the Driver Door Only*1/
Door Unlock Mode
driver’s door handle. All Doors

Keyless Access Light Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/
Keyless On*1/Off
Flash lock the doors.
Access
Setup Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the

Features
Keyless Access Beep On*1/Off
Vehicle doors.
Remote Start System On/
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off
Off
Interior Light Dimming Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on 60 sec/30 sec*1/
Time after you close the doors. 15 sec

Lighting Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on 60 sec/30 sec/
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Setup after you close the driver’s door. 15 sec*1/0 sec

Max/High/Mid*1/
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Low/Min

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models Continued 329

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 330 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

With Vehicle
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically
Auto Door Lock Speed*1/Shift from
lock.
P/Off
All Doors When
Driver’s Door
Opens*1/All Doors
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically
Auto Door Unlock When Shift to
unlock.
Park/All Doors
Door When Ignition
Features

Setup Switching Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock Driver Door*1/All
Vehicle Mode on the first push of the remote or built-in key. Doors

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

Keyless Lock Answer Back On*1/Off
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
90 sec/60 sec/30
Security Relock Timer the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle
sec*1
without opening any door.
Mainte-
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
nance Maintenance Reset —
performed the maintenance service.
Info.

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle

Default Yes/No
group as default.

*1:Default Setting
330
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 331 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

-6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (BASS
and TREBLE),
RR9~0*1 ~FR9
(FADER), L9~*1 0~R9
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound. (BALANCE), -6 ~ 0*1
Sound
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 230 ~ +6 (Subwoofer),
Off/Low/Mid*1/
High (Speed
Volume
Compensation)

Features
Common
Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources
Audio Source Pop-
comes on when Audio is selected on the home On/Off*1
Up
Audio screen.
iPod or USB mode
[Your selected media] Turns the cover art display on and off. On*1/Off
Cover Art
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired
Bluetooth Device
phone. —
List
2 Phone Setup P. 380

Selects whether the audio system automatically

FM/AM mode HD Radio Mode * switches to the digital radio waves or receives the Auto*1/Analog
analogue waves only.
FM/AM
RDS INFO Turns on and off the RDS information. On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models Continued 331

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 332 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Group
Turns on and off, starts the song from the beginning as
Tune Start On*1/Off
you change preset stations.

Off*1/
SportsFlash
Turns on and off the sports alert function. On(one time)/
Setup(Interrupt)
On(continue)
SportsFlash
SiriusXM® mode Causes the system to beep when the sports alert is
Setup(Interrupt On*1/Off
SXM * notified.
Audio Beep)
Features

SportsFlash
Selects your favorite sports teams.
Setup(Favorite —
2 Live Sports Alert P. 246
Team)

Traffic & Weather

Selects the region you want to receive the information. —
Setup
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Default Yes/No
settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

332 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 333 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Group

Clock/ Clock
Wallpaper
Type Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment *

Clock Format
Clock Auto Time Zone * See System on P. 323

Manual Time Zone *

Features
Clock/ Auto Daylight
Info
Clock Display

Clock Reset

Diagnostic & Location

HondaLink Turns HondaLink® on and off. On/Off
Data

Info Screen
Other Changes the information screen type. Info Menu*1/Off
Preference

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Clock/Info

Default Yes/No
settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models Continued 333

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 334 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Group
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a
Bluetooth Device
paired phone. —
List
2 Phone Setup P. 380

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

Edit Speed Dial —
2 Speed Dial P. 386
Phone Fixed/Mobile
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone.
Phone*1

Automatic Phone Sets phonebook and call history data to be

On*1/Off
Features

Phone Sync automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

HondaLink Assist Turns HondaLink Assist on and off. On/Off*1

Enable Text/Email Turns the text/e-mail message function on and off. On*1/Off

Select Account Selects a text or e-mail message account. —

Text/Email
New Message Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen
On/Off
Notification when HFL receives a new text/e-mail messages.
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Default Yes/No
settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

334
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 335 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Group
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear
Fixed Guideline camera monitor. On*1/Off
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 480

Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on the

Rear Camera
Dynamic Guideline rear camera monitor. On*1/Off
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 480

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear

Default Yes/No
Camera setting group as default.

Features
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
Camera Show with Turn
when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a On*1/Off
Signal
right turn.
Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display
Display Time after 0 second*1/
stays on after the turn signal lever returns to the
LaneWatch Turn Signal Off 2 seconds
center.
Selects whether the reference lines come on the
Reference Line On*1/Off
LaneWatch monitor.

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Default Yes/No
LaneWatch group as default.

*1:Default Setting

Continued 335
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 336 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Bluetooth On/Off
Selects to change the Bluetooth® status. On*1/Off
Status
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired
Bluetooth Device
Bluetooth phone. —
List
2 Phone Setup P. 380

Edits a pairing code.

Edit Pairing Code Random/Fixed*1
Bluetooth/ 2 To change the pairing code setting P. 381
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi On/Off Status Changes the Wi-Fi mode. On*1/Off
Features

Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Network List —
device.
Wi-Fi Information Shows the Wi-Fi information of the device. —

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Default Yes/No
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default.

Enable Once/
Sets up the Apple CarPlay®/Android AutoTM
Smartphone Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Always Enable/
connection.
Cancel

*1:Default Setting

336
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 337 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1Defaulting All the Settings
1. Select . When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
2. Select Settings. all settings to default and delete all personal data.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab. If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
5. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
screen. HondaLink® because it becomes off line.
6. Select Yes. 2 HondaLink® P. 267
7. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u After selecting Yes, the system will
reboot.

Features
337
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 338 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three 1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
home security systems. door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
■ Important Safety Precautions eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
Features

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.

Training HomeLink
If it is necessary to erase a previously entered
Red Indicator learned code:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.

The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but
may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener,
visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.

338 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 339 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink

■ Training a Button 1Training HomeLink

Retraining a Button
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
HomeLink button you want to program. new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
2. Press and release the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote using this procedure:
transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to
constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
YES NO NO
Standard transmitter Rolling code transmitter
3. Press and hold the Press and release the HomeLink button. Press Indicator remains on Indicator remains on for
and release the button on the remote every 2 for about 25 secs. about 25 secs.
programmed HomeLink
secs.

Features
button for about a sec. YES Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from
Does the device (garage 2. Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow
slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly
door opener) work? steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.” You do not
blinking? The process should take less than 60
seconds. need to press and release the HomeLink button
YES NO again in step 2.

4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. Erasing Codes

Training To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
Complete HomeLink LED is HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks. buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
constantly on. (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
A. The remote has a rolling code. Press the
5. Press and hold the HomeLink
“learn” button on the remote-controlled If you have any problems, see the device’s
button again. device (e.g. garage door opener). instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
The remote-controlled device
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
should operate.
B. Within 30 secs, press and hold the HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex
Training Complete Corporation.
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

339
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 340 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Models with one display 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
Using HFL 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
■ HFL Buttons 528-7876.

Volume up To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be On.

2 Customized Features P. 295
Microphone
Pick-up Voice control tips
Button • Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
Features

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

Volume down with the microphone.
PHONE
Button • Press and release the button when you want to
Hang-up/Back Button call a number using a stored voice tag, a
Selector phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
Talk Button Knob naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call. • To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
steering wheel.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number. State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.

340
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 341 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
Bluetooth Indicator trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
Battery Level
Comes on when your Status use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
phone is connected to HFL. license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
Roam Status
HFL Mode of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations
Caller’s Name Signal Strength An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
Caller’s Number is ended.

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

Features
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
■ Limitations for Manual Operation information screen varies between phone models.
Certain manual functions are disabled or
You can change the system language to English,
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
French, or Spanish.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until 2 Customized Features P. 295
the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with

voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
Disabled Option
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 358

341
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 342 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL. 1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
■ Phone Settings screen compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
1. Press the SETTINGS button. is parked.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
press .
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

Connect
Phone*1
Add Bluetooth Device Pair a phone to the system.
Features

(Existing entry list) Connect a phone to the system.

Disconnect Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Bluetooth (Existing
Edit PIN Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Device List entry list)
Replace This Replace a previously paired phone with a
Device new phone.
Delete This
Device Delete a previously paired phone.
Add
Bluetooth Pair a phone to the system.
Device

*1: Appears when a phone has already been paired to HFL.

342
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 343 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a

speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the call
New Entry
Call History
history to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the
Phonebook phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Edit Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

● Change a number.
Edit Speed (Existing
Phone ● Create or delete a voice tag.
Dial*1 entry list)
Delete Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.

Features
Delete All Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.
Auto Transfer Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Auto Answer Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Ring Tone Select the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync*1 Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued 343
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 344 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Enable Text Message Turn the text message function on and off.
Text Messages *1
New Text Message Alert Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text message.
Message Auto Reading Set the system to automatically read an incoming text message.

Default Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Features

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

344
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 345 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone screen
1. Press the PHONE button.
Phone menu
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Speed Dial Phonebook

Redial Dial

Call History Text messages

Dial*1 Enter a phone number to dial.

Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
Call
All Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Features
History*1
Dialed Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Received Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.

Speed Dial*1 New Entry Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
Call History speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
Phonebook speed dial number.
(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
More Speed Dials Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued 345
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 346 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phonebook*1 Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Read/Stop System reads received message aloud, or

Select a message stop message from being read.
and press . Previous Message See the previous message.
Message is read
Text Messages *1
Next Message See the next message.
aloud.
Reply Reply to a received message using one of
six fixed phrases.
Call Make a call to the sender.
Features

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

346
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 347 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup 1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
phone paired to the system) calls.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . Phone Pairing Tips:
3. Make sure your phone is in search or • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
discoverable mode, then press .
• Up to six phones can be paired.
u HFL automatically searches for a • Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
Bluetooth device. paired to HFL.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select • If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
it by pressing . by the system within three minutes, the system will
u If your phone does not appear, you can time out and returns to idle.

Features
select Refresh to search again.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
u If your phone still does not appear, select
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
Phone Not Found and search for right side.
Bluetooth devices using your phone. These icons indicate the following:
From your phone, select : The phone can be used with HFL.
HandsFreeLink. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen. When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
history and phonebook automatically imported to
and your phone match. HFL.
This may vary by phone. 2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
6. You will receive a notification on the screen setting P. 357
if pairing is successful.

Continued 347
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 348 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Connect Phone, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
Features

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

348
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 349 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the pairing code setting 1To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button. The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then on your phone.
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,
current code, then enter a new one.
then press .
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
Edit Pairing Code

Features
Continued 349
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 350 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To replace an already-paired phone 1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
with a new phone The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. entries, call history, and security PIN information from
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342 the previously paired phone.
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
4. Rotate to select Replace This Device,
then press .
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
Features

u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

350
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 351 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. Rotate to select Delete This Device,
then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .

Features
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.

Continued 351
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 352 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up Text Message Options

■ To turn on or off the text message
function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Text Messages, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text Message.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
Features

352
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 353 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To turn on or off the text message 1To turn on or off the text message notice
notice On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate receive a new message.
to select New Text Message Alert, then Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
press . without notification.
2. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.

■ To set up the auto reading option 1To set up the auto reading option
1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate On: A text message is always read aloud.
to select Message Auto Reading, then Off: A text message is not read aloud.

Features
press . Auto: A text message is read aloud only when
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen. driving.
2. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto then
press .

Continued 353
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 354 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Create a Security PIN 1To Create a Security PIN

If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN. need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. the PIN or creating a new one.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Rotate to select, then press .
Press to delete. Press OK to enter the
Features

security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.

354
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 355 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .

Features
■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate to select On, then press .

Continued 355
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 356 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone 1Ring Tone

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
You can change the ring tone setting. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342 will sound if the phone is connected.
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.
3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
Features

356
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 357 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
On: The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
When your phone is paired, the contents of its for that name.
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL. Pref Fax

Home Car

Mobile Other

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync Work Pager

setting

Features
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. Voice
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync. The phonebook is updated after every connection.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press Call history is updated after every connection or call.
.

Continued 357
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 358 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial 1Speed Dial

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
To store a speed dial number: the voice tag name.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
Mr.AAA 111AAA#### 2 Phone menu screen P. 378
Mr.BBB 222BBB####

Mr.CCC 333CCC#### 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press

Mr.DDD 444DDD####
.
Mr.EEE 555EEE####
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
3. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
Features

Select a method to store u Select a number from the call history.

From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Rotate to
select Yes or No, then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

358
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 359 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed 1Speed Dial

dial number Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342 It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
.

Features
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

Continued 359
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 360 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a voice tag

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
Features

select Clear, then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .

■ To delete a speed dial

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .

360
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 361 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a Call 1Making a Call

Voice-tagged speed dial entries, phonebook name,
You can make calls by inputting any phone or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Phone menu
number, or by using the imported Press the button and say “Call” and the
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or phonebook name, phone number, or stored voice
Speed Dial Phonebook redial. tag.
Redial Dial
The maximum range between your phone and
Call History Text messages
vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

Features
Continued 361
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 362 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported 1To make a call using the imported phonebook
phonebook This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
2 Phone menu screen P. 378 dial number, phonebook name, or number using
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 341
press .
2 Speed Dial P. 358
3. Rotate to select a name, then press .
u You can also search by letter. Rotate
to select Alphabet Search, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
Features

u Dialing starts automatically.

362
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 363 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a phone number 1To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone menu screen. This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378 However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . dial number, phonebook name, or number using
3. Rotate to select a number, then press voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 341
.
2 Speed Dial P. 358
4. Rotate to select , then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using redial

1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378

Features
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued 363
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 364 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the call history 1To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
Received, and Missed. missed calls.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen. (Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Rotate to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate to select All, Dialed, Received,
or Missed, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Features

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry 1To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen. Select More Speed Dials to view another paired
2 Phone menu screen P. 378 phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call from that
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press list using the currently connected phone.
.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
3. Rotate to select a number, then press .
call the number using the voice tag.
u Dialing starts automatically. 2 Speed Dial P. 358

Voice-tagged speed dial entries, phonebook name,

or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.

To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the

corresponding preset buttons from the Phone
screen.

364
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 365 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call 1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting
When there is an incoming call, an audible
Press the button to put the current call on hold to
notification sounds (if activated) and the answer the incoming call.
Incoming Call screen appears. Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Press the button to answer the call. Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
Press the button to decline or end the call. it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.

Features
Continued 365
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 366 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call 1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
Mute Icon Pres the MENU button to display the options.
Rotate to select the mute option, then
press .
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Features

366
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 367 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text Message 1Receiving a Text Message

The system does not display any received messages
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently while you are driving. You can only hear them read
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud aloud.
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new 20 most recent text messages.
text message.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the message feature. Only use the text message feature
message, then press . when conditions allow you to do so safely.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out When you receive a text message for the first time
the message. after the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to

Features
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press turn the New Text Message Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text message notice
.
P. 353

Continued 367
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 368 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Text Messages 1Displaying Text Messages

The icon appears next to an unread message.
1. Press the PHONE button.
Message List
2. Press the MENU button. If you delete a message on the phone, the message
3. Rotate to select Text Messages, then will also be deleted from the system. If you send a
press . message from the system, the message goes to your
4. Rotate to select a message, then press phone’s outbox.
.
To see the previous or next message, press on the
u The text message is displayed. The text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate
system automatically starts reading the to select Previous Message or Next Message,
message aloud. then press .

Text Message
Features

368
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 369 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Using the Stop or Read option 1Using the Stop or Read option
1. Go to the text message screen. This option changes to:
u The system automatically starts reading • Stop while the text message is read out. Select this
the message aloud. option to discontinue the message read out.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 368 • Read when the system has finished reading out the
text message, or after you selected Stop.
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear
Select this option to hear the system read out the
on the screen.
selected message.
3. Rotate to select Stop or Read, then
press .

■ Reply to a message 1Reply to a message

1. Go to the text message screen. The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.

Features
u The system automatically starts reading
• I’m on my way.
the message aloud.
• I’m running late.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 368
• OK
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear • Yes
on the screen. • No
3. Rotate to select Reply, then press .
4. Rotate to select the reply message, then You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

Continued 369
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 370 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender

1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 368
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Call, then press .
Features

370
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 371 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Models with two displays 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
Using HFL 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
■ HFL Buttons
To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status
setting must be On. If there is an active connection to
Volume up Volume down MENU Button Apple CarPlay® or Android AutoTM, HFL is unavailable.
2 How to customize P. 314

Voice control tips

Features
Microphone
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphones.
• Press the button when you want to call a
number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphones pick up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, select the audio
(Talk) Button system's VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio
(Hang-up/Back) Button controls on the steering wheel.
(Pick-up) Button Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among
a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entry
in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 386

Up to five call histories can be displayed among a

total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.

Continued 371
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 372 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen, or to answer an 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
incoming call. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
command, or cancel a command. use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
MENU button: Press to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the phone of their respective owners.
screen.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
To go to the Phone menu screen:
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
1. Select . is ended.
2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen.
3. Select . Place your phone where you can get good reception.
Features

372
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 373 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display 1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/
The audio/information screen and audio/information touch screen notify you when information screen and audio/information touch
there is an incoming call. screen varies between phone models.
Audio/information screen
You can change the system language.
Bluetooth Indicator Battery Level Status 2 How to customize P. 314
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode

Caller’s Name

Features
Caller’s Number

Audio/information touch screen

Bluetooth Indicator Battery Level Status

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength

Caller’s Name
Roaming Status

Caller’s Number

Continued 373
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 374 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ Limitations for Manual Operation

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or
numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 386
Features

374
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 375 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system. 1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
■ Phone settings screen compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
1. Select . is parked.
2. Select Settings.
Some functions are limited while driving.
3. Select Phone.

Features
Phone

Bluetooth Device List (Existing entry list) Connect Connect a paired device to
Connect the system.
Connect

Disconnect Disconnect a paired phone

from the system.
Delete Delete a paired phone.

Add Bluetooth Device Pair a new phone to the system.

Continued 375
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 376 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Edit Speed Dial (Existing entry list) Edit Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
● Change a name.
● Change a number.
● Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

New Entry Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed

dial number.

Import from Call History Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.
Features

Import from Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook

to store as a speed dial number.

Delete All Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.

Ring Tone Select the ring tone.

Automatic Phone Sync Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

HondaLink Assist Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.

376
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 377 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Text/Email Enable Text/Email Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.

Select Account Select a mail or text message account.

New Message Notification Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text/e-mail message.

Default Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone settings group as default.

Features
Continued 377
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 378 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone menu screen

1. Select .
2. Select Phone.
3. Select .

Speed Dial (Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
New Entry Enter a phone number to store as a speed
Features

Manual Input
dial number.
Import from Call History Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.
Import from Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.
Phonebook Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Redial Redial the last number dialed.
Dial Enter a phone number to dial.
Call History All Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Dialed Display the last outgoing calls.
Received Display the last incoming calls.
Missed Display the last missed calls.

378
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 379 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Text/Email (Existing a message list) Read/Stop System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
See the previous message.

See the next message.

Reply Reply to a received message using one of six

fixed phrases.

Call Make a call to the sender.

Features
Select Account Select a mail or text message account.

Continued 379
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 380 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup 1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no the system before you can make and receive hands-
phone paired to the system) free calls.
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Yes. Phone Pairing Tips:
3. Make sure your phone is in search or • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
discoverable mode, then select Continue.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
u HFL automatically searches for a • Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
Bluetooth® device. paired to the system.
4. Select your phone when it appears on the • If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
list. by the system within three minutes, the system will
u If your phone does not appear, you can time out and return to idle.
Features

select Refresh to search again.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
u If your phone still does not appear, select displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
Phone Not Found and search for right side.
Bluetooth® devices using your phone. These icons indicate the following:
From your phone, search for : The phone can be used with HFL.
HandsFreeLink. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay®,
audio/information touch screen.
pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed
and your phone match. out from the Bluetooth Device List screen.
This may vary by phone.

380
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 381 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the currently paired phone 1To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen. If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
2 Phone settings screen P. 375 switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
2. Select Bluetooth Device List. original phone is connected again.
3. Select a phone to connect.
To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
from the Bluetooth device list screen.
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
4. Select Connect , Connect , or
Connect .

■ To change the pairing code setting 1To change the pairing code setting

Features
1. Select . The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
2. Select Settings. setting.
3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
4. Select the Bluetooth tab. current code, then enter a new one.
5. Select Edit Pairing Code.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.

6. Select Random or Fixed.

Continued 381
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 382 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone

1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Bluetooth Device List.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.

4. Select Delete.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
Features

382
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 383 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options 1To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options

To use the text message/e-mail function, it may be
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail necessary to set up on your phone.
function
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice 1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
1. Go to the Phone settings screen. On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you

Features
2 Phone settings screen P. 375 receive a new message.
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
Message Notification. without notification.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

Continued 383
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 384 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone 1Ring Tone

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
You can change the ring tone setting. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model
1. Go to the Phone settings screen. of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone
2 Phone settings screen P. 375 will sound if the phone is connected.
2. Select Ring Tone.
3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.
Features

384
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 385 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
On: The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
When your phone is paired, the contents of its for that name.
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system. Pref Fax

Home Car

Mobile Other

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync Work Voice

setting

Features
Pager Blank
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Automatic Phone Sync. On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

3. Select On or Off.

Continued 385
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 386 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial 1Speed Dial

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag
To store a speed dial number: name.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select New Entry.
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
Features

u Select a number from the connected cell

phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Select Yes or No.

5. Select Record to store a voice tag for the

speed dial entry.
u Using the button, follow the prompts
to store a voice tag for the speed dial
entry.

386
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 387 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed 1Speed Dial

dial number Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen. Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375 It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.
2. Select Edit Speed Dial. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.
5. Select Record, or use the button and
follow the prompts to complete the voice
tag.

Features
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

Continued 387
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 388 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To edit a speed dial

1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select a setting you want.

■ To delete a speed dial

1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
Features

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.
4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

388
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 389 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification 1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■ To add a new voice tag
1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to add
phonetic modification to.

Features
Continued 389
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 390 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

7. Select New Voice Tag.

8. Select a contact name you want to add to.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
9. Select Modify.
10. Using Record or the button, follow the
prompts to complete the voice tag.
11. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.
Features

390
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 391 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To modify a voice tag 1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

1. Select . You can only modify or delete contact names for the
2. Select Settings. currently connected phone.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to modify
phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to
modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the

Features
screen.
8. Select Modify.
9. Using Record or the button, follow the
prompts to complete the voice tag.
10. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.

Continued 391
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 392 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a modified voice tag

1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Select Delete.
Features

u The selected contact name has been

selected.
9. Select OK.

392
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 393 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete all modified voice tags

1. Select .
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification.
u The contact name list appears.
7. Select Delete All.
8. You will receive a confirmation message on

Features
the screen, then select Yes.

1Making a Call
Voice-tagged speed dial entries can be dialed by
■ Making a Call voice from most screens.
You can make calls by inputting any phone Press the button and say the voice tag name.
number, or by using the imported
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
the person you are calling through the audio
redial. speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple

CarPlay®, phone calls cannot be made with
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® and are only made from
Apple CarPlay®.

Continued 393
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 394 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported

phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Phonebook.
3. Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select
Search.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering name, if multiple numbers exist
select a number.
4. Select a number.
Features

u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a phone number

1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select Dial.
u Dialing starts automatically.

394
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 395 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using redial 1To make a call using redial

1. Go to the Phone menu screen. Press and hold the button to redial the last
2 Phone menu screen P. 378 number dialed.
2. Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using the Call History 1To make a call using the Call History
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed,
Received, and Missed. received, or missed calls.

Features
1. Go to the Phone menu screen. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the
2 Phone menu screen P. 378 system.)
2. Select Call History.
3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a Speed Dial entry 1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen. When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
2 Phone menu screen P. 378 call the number using the voice tag.
2. Select Speed Dial. 2 Speed Dial P. 386
3. Select a number.
Voice-tagged speed dial entries can be dialed by
u Dialing starts automatically.
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.

Continued 395
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 396 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call 1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting
When there is an incoming call, an audible Press the button to put the current call on hold to
notification sounds (if activated) and the answer the incoming call.
incoming call screen appears. Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Press the button to answer the call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
Press the button to decline or end the call. not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

touch screen instead of the and buttons.
Features

396
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 397 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call 1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice. You can select the icons on the audio/information
Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. touch screen.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
Audio/information screen
Mute Icon

Features
Audio/information touch screen The available options are shown on the lower
Mute Icon half of the audio/information touch screen.

Select the option.

u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Continued 397
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 398 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text Message/E-mail 1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

The system does not display any received messages
HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most while you are driving. You can only hear them read
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be aloud.
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new The system can only receive massages that are sent a
text message or e-mail. text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the
data services will not be displayed in the list.
2. Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text message or e-mail is displayed. With some phones, you may be able to display up to
The system automatically starts reading 20 most recent text messages and e-mails.
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
Stop. message/e-mail feature. Only use the text message/e-mail
Features

feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.

When you receive a text message or e-mail for the

first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Message Notification
setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
P. 383

398
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 399 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Selecting a Mail Account 1Selecting a Mail Account

You can also select a mail account from the folder list
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to screen or the message list screen.
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 375
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Select
Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Text Message or an e-mail account
you want.
Select
Account

Features
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.

Continued 399
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 400 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Messages 1Displaying Messages

The icon appears next to an unread message.
Message List ■ Displaying text messages
1. Go to the Phone menu screen. If you delete a message on the phone, the message
2 Phone menu screen P. 378 will also be deleted from the system. If you send a
2. Select Text/Email. message from the system, the message goes to your
u Select account if necessary. phone’s outbox.
3. Select a message.
To see the previous or next message, select or
u The text message is displayed. The on the message screen.
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
Text Message
Features

400
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 401 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Folder List ■ Displaying e-mails

1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 378
2. Select Text/Email.
u Select Select Account if necessary.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a message.
u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
Message List
aloud.

Features
E-mail

Continued 401
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 402 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Read or Stop reading a message

1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 400
2. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the
message from the beginning.

■ Reply to a message 1Reply to a message

1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen. The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
u The system automatically starts reading • Talk to you later, I’m driving.
the message aloud. • I’m on my way.
Features

2 Displaying Messages P. 400 • I’m running late.

• OK
2. Select Reply.
• Yes
3. Select the reply message. • No
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message. You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

402
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 403 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender

1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Call.

Features
Continued 403
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 404 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ In Case of Emergency 1In Case of Emergency

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
■ Automatic collision notification operator if the battery level is low, the line is
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, coverage.
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink operator. If You cannot use this emergency services when:
• You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
connected, information about your vehicle, its
areas.
location, and its condition will be sent to the • There is a problem with the connecting devices,
operator; you also can speak to the operator such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
when connected. itself.

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation You cannot operate other phone-related functions
Features

using the screen while talking to the operator.

constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ vehicle.
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
1Automatic collision notification
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.

404
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 405 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To enable notification 1To enable notification

1. Go to the Phone settings screen. Setting options:
2 Phone settings screen P. 375 • On: Notification is available.
2. Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink • Off: Disable the feature.
Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

Features
405
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 406 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Compass *

When you set the power mode to ON, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass 1Compass *
display appears. Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
• Driving near power lines or stations
• Crossing a bridge
• Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
Compass Calibration object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
• When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need are mounted by magnets
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Set the power mode to ON. 1Compass Calibration
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
press and hold for five seconds.
Features

u The display switches to the Compass While setting the compass, select to cancel the
settings screen. setting mode and return to the previous screen.
3. Select Calibration.
4. Select Calibration Start.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.

406 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 407 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCompass * uCompass Zone Selection

Compass Zone Selection

1. Set the power mode to ON. 1Compass Zone Selection
2. On the top screen of any audio source, The zone selection is done to compensate the
press and hold for five seconds. variation between magnetic north and true north.
u The display switches to the Compass
settings screen. If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
3. Select Zone Adjust. use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
u The display shows the current zone is completed.
number the system is set to.
4. Select the zone number of your area (See
Zone Map).

Zone Map
2 15

Features
14
3 13

4
12
5 10 11
6 9
7 8

Guam Island: Zone 8

Puerto Rico: Zone 11

407
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 408 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

408
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 409 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)......... 429 Brake Assist System ......................... 466
Driving Preparation .......................... 410 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
Maximum Load Limit........................ 413 System ....................................... 443 (CMBSTM) ....................................... 467
Towing a Trailer Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).... 447 Parking Your Vehicle
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 415 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic When Stopped ................................ 475
When Driving Stability Control (ESC), System...........454 Parking Sensor System * ................... 476
Turning on the Power ...................... 416 LaneWatchTM ................................... 456 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 480
Precautions While Driving................. 421 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 458 Refueling
Transmission .................................... 421 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Fuel Information .............................. 482
Shifting ............................................ 422 Required Federal Explanation ......... 460 How to Refuel ................................. 483
ECON Button ................................... 424 High Voltage Battery........................ 462 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
SPORT Mode.................................... 425 Braking Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System...... 426 Brake System ................................... 463 CO2 Emissions................................ 484
Front Sensor Camera ....................... 427 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 465

* Not available on all models 409

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 410 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

■ Exterior Checks 1Exterior Checks

NOTICE
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
lights, or other parts of the vehicle. the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. further freezing.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components. Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
freezes in the hole.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition. Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear. flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 516 fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
Driving

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
u There are blind spots from the inside.
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.

410
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 411 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

■ Interior Checks 1Interior Checks

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
• Store or secure all items on board properly. need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 413
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.

Driving
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 126
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 160
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 163
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 158
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 157

Continued 411
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 412 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 41
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 74
Driving

412
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 413 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire 1Maximum Load Limit
and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
3 WARNING
Label Example Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 564
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -

Driving
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
vehicle's placard. 2 Specifications P. 564
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Continued 413
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 414 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,

accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving

Example1

Max Load Passenger Weight Cargo Weight

850 lbs 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs 550 lbs
(385 kg) (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) (249 kg)

Example2

Max Load Passenger Weight Cargo Weight

850 lbs 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs 100 lbs
(385 kg) (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) (45 kg)

414
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 415 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.

Towing Your Vehicle

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 561

Driving
415
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 416 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

When Driving
Turning on the Power
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 1When Driving
When you set the power mode to ON, you may feel
as if the brake pedal is sinking down. This is normal.

1Turning on the Power

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the power system.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
depress the brake pedal. meters).
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
When turning on the power system in cold weather,
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .
turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights,
climate control system, and rear defogger in order to
reduce the 12-volt battery drain.
Driving

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,

Brake Pedal an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can

smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.

416
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 417 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

3. Press the POWER button without 1Turning on the Power

depressing the accelerator pedal. The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
4. Check the READY indicator. theft.
u Keep depressing the brake pedal until If an improperly coded device is used, the power
the READY indicator comes on. system does not activate.
2 Immobilizer System P. 134
u The READY indicator comes on when
the power system is on and you can start
Bring the smart entry remote close to the POWER
driving. button if the battery in the smart entry remote is
u If the outside temperature is extremely weak.
low, you cannot drive until conditions are 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
improved. In this case, the READY P. 546
indicator does not come on, as well as a
The power system may not activate if the smart entry
warning message appears on the multi-
remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
information display.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning If the smart entry remote battery is low, touch the

Driving
and Information Messages P. 88 POWER button with the remote.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 546

The engine may not run when the vehicle is ready for
driving.
You can start driving with the READY indicator on.
If you press the POWER button while depressing the
brake pedal with the READY indicator on, the power
mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) and you cannot
start driving.
2 READY Indicator P. 75

Continued 417
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 418 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

■ Remote Engine Start 1Remote Engine Start

You can remotely turn the power system on using the smart entry remote. 3 WARNING
Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon
■ To turn the power system on monoxide.

Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you or

cause unconsciousness.
Press the button, then press and hold the button.
Never use the remote engine starter when
the vehicle is parked in a garage or other
area with limited ventilation.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your

vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
While the vehicle is moving, the range may be
The power system is on for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle. reduced.
Driving

To extend the time for another 10 minutes during the first 10 minutes, press the This distance may vary by external electrical
button, then press and hold the button. interference.
u The turn signal lights come back on three times, twice, if a 10-minute
The power system may not be turned on by the remote
extension request was transmitted successfully.
engine start if:
• You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the multi-information display, audio/
information screen *, or audio/information touch
screen *.
• The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The shift lever is in a position other than (P .
• The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
• You have already used the remote twice to turn the
power system on.
• Another registered smart entry remote is in the
vehicle.

418 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 419 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

■ To turn the power system off 1Remote Engine Start

• There is any antenna failure.
• Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
Press and hold the button • The engine oil pressure is low.
for one second. • The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The security system alarm is not set.

The power system may be turned off while it is on if:

• You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
turning the power system on with the button
on the smart entry remote.
• The power system is turned off by using the smart
entry remote.
• Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
• The hood is open.
• The shift lever is in a position other than (P .
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.

Driving
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on if
there is a problem with the emissions control
systems.

While the power system is on, the vehicle will

automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
• The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode.
When it is cold outside:
• The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
• The rear defogger and door mirror heaters are
activated.

Continued 419
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 420 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

■ Stopping the Power System

You can turn the power system off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

1. Shift to (P .
2. Press the POWER button.

■ Starting to Drive 1Starting to Drive

When the power system is turned on using the button
When the power system is turned on using the button on the smart entry remote on the smart entry remote
1. While depressing the brake pedal, press the POWER button. The power system is off when the shift lever is moved
When the power system is turned on in any case out of (P before the POWER button is pressed.
Follow the step 1 when starting to drive.
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, check that the READY indicator is on,
then release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone
off.
2 Parking Brake P. 463
Driving

3. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.

4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull 1Hill start assist system
away. Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
■ Hill start assist system does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator. brake.

Move the shift lever to (D or B when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, As a hybrid vehicle, the sounds and vibrations from
then release the brake pedal. the engine may be absent even though the vehicle is
ready for driving. It also makes you fail to recognize
that you can start.
Make sure to check if the READY indicator is on
before you start to drive.

420
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 421 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving

■ In Rain 1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the power
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
system or driveline, or cause electrical component failure. accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
■ Other Precautions If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. driving, the power system will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks. making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose

Transmission regenerative braking (and acceleration) performance.

■ Creeping During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,

avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
As with a conventional gasoline-powered vehicle with an automatic transmission, as to not damage the powertrain.
this vehicle will creep.

Driving
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped. Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
■ Kickdown
NOTICE
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the vehicle
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
to react similar to an automatic transmission vehicle, unexpectedly increasing vehicle extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and the full left or right position for a while, the electric
curves. power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.

421
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 422 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs. 1Shifting
While the High Voltage battery level is full, or the
■ Shift lever positions High Voltage battery temperature is low,
regenerative braking may become less effective.

You cannot change the power mode from ON to

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P .
Park
Used when parking or turning the When shifting positions in extremely low
power on or off. temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
Reverse
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
Used when reversing.
driving.

Neutral
Propulsion power is not transmitted to
wheels.
Driving

Drive
Used for normal driving.
Release Button

Drive (B)
Used when driving down a long hill and
to increase regenerative braking.

422
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 423 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Lever Operation 1Shift Lever Operation

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the

lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in

Shift Lever Position Indicator any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift. button is held down.

Driving
Shift without pressing the shift lever Depress the brake pedal first.
release button.

Press the shift lever release button

and shift.

423
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 424 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button

ECON Button

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.

The ECON mode helps you improve your driving range by adjusting the performance
of the climate control system.
Driving

424
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 425 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguSPORT Mode

SPORT Mode
SPORT Mode Indicator

Press

SPORT Button

To turn the SPORT mode on and off, press the SPORT button.

Driving
The SPORT mode increases engine performance and handling.
This mode is not recommended for fuel economy enhancement, but suitable for
driving on hills or through curves on mountain roads.

The SPORT mode is turned off every time you start the power system, even if you
turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

425
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 426 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAcoustic Vehicle Alerting System

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System

Alerts pedestrians when a vehicle is propelled solely by electricity, approaching at
speeds around 12 mph (20 km/h) or less.

Canadian models

■ Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System Button

Press the button to turn the system on and
off.
u The indicator in the button comes on
when the system is off.

The system is turned on every time you turn

the power system on, even if you turned it off
the last time you drove the vehicle.
Driving

426
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 427 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera

Front Sensor Camera

The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBSTM, is designed to 1Front Sensor Camera
detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions. Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could
■ Camera Location and Handling Tips obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Front Sensor This camera is located behind the rearview Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
Camera mirror. within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
area or face the front of the vehicle away from may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
not allow it to cover the camera housing. recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
it.

Driving
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.

Continued 427
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 428 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera

1Front Sensor Camera

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
Driving

while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

428
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 429 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator. 3 WARNING
When to use Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.

The camera is Use ACC only when driving on

located behind expressways or freeways in good
the rearview weather conditions.
mirror.

3 WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability.

When your vehicle speed drops below

The radar sensor is 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will
at the lower part of automatically cancel and no longer will

Driving
the front bumper.
apply your vehicle’s brakes.

Always be prepared to apply the brake

pedal when conditions require.
■ Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
■ Shift position for ACC: In (D . Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the
brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a
safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly

impacted.

Continued 429
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 430 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ How to activate the system 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

How to use When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane
ACC (green) is on in the Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or
multi-information off.
display.
■ Press the MAIN button on ACC is ready to use. ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.
the steering wheel.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 434

When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by

pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

Do not use ACC under the following conditions:

• On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
• On roads with sharp turns.
• On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
Driving

vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such

cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain
the set speed.
• On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.

430
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 431 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed 1To Set the Vehicle Speed

You can switch the displayed set speed
−/SET Button measurements on the multi-information display
between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314

On when ACC
begins
Press and release

Take your foot off the pedal and press down the –/SET button when you reach the
desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC
begins.
When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon,

Driving
Set Vehicle Interval
interval bars and set speed appear on the
multi-information display.

Set Vehicle Speed

Continued 431
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 432 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ When in Operation 1When in Operation

If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down
■ There is a vehicle ahead abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in
ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected front of you, the beeper sounds and a message
doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order appears on the multi-information display.
to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead. Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-Interval P. 437

Beep

ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

Driving

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than

your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start
and is detected by the radar and the camera, accelerating your vehicle under the following
your vehicle starts to slow down. circumstances:
• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
• A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.
A vehicle icon appears on the
multi-information display.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle
detected in front of you comes in and goes out of the
ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Pre-Running
Car Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 108, 295, 314

432
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 433 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ There is no vehicle ahead 1When in Operation

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without Limitations
having to keep your foot on the brake or You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
accelerator pedal. interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not
If there previously was a vehicle detected work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 434
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to
the set speed, and then maintains it.
A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the multi-
information display.

■ When you depress the accelerator pedal 1When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or While the accelerator pedal is depressed, the system
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC range. does not apply the brakes to keep the following-

Driving
ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the interval, as well as the BRAKE message on the multi-
system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following-interval while a information display does not appear.
vehicle ahead is within the ACC range. 2 When in Operation P. 432

Continued 433
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 434 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ ACC Conditions and Limitations 1ACC Conditions and Limitations

The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions. (CMBSTM) P. 467
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
■ Environmental conditions Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
■ Roadway conditions
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, replace the radar sensor cover.
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
■ Vehicle conditions impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Driving

• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction, Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
improperly inflated, etc.). unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
• The camera temperature gets too high. message appears too frequently).
• The parking brake is applied. If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
• When the radar sensor cover is dirty. following situations, the radar sensor may not work
• When the front of the vehicle tilts up due to heavy cargo in the trunk or rear seats. properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
• When tire chains are installed. • The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
• You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
• Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

You can read about handling information for the

camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427

434
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 435 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.

Driving
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.

Continued 435
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 436 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed 1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the than your increased set speed, ACC may not
steering wheel. accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
following-interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead.
To increase speed

To decrease speed

• Each time you press the switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or
Driving

decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.

• If you keep the switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

436
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 437 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ To Set or Change Following-Interval

Press the (interval) button to change the
ACC following-interval.
Each time you press the button, the following-
interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through short,
middle, long, and extra long following-
intervals.
Interval Button
Determine the most appropriate following-
interval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-interval requirements set by local
regulation.

Driving
Continued 437
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 438 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.

When the Set Speed is:

Vehicle Interval
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)

84 feet 102 feet

Short 26 meters 31 meters
1.1 sec 1.1 sec
111 feet 139 feet
Middle 34 meters 43 meters
1.5 sec 1.5 sec
155 feet 202 feet
Long 48 meters 62 meters
Driving

2.1 sec 2.1 sec

215 feet 285 feet

Extra
66 meters 87 meters
Long
3.0 sec 3.0 sec

438
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 439 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ To Cancel 1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
MAIN To cancel ACC, do any of the following: canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed
Button • Press the CANCEL button. while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button
• Press the MAIN button. when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h)
u The ACC indicator (green) goes off. or more.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press
the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the
CANCEL desired speed.
Button

Driving
Continued 439
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 440 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ Automatic cancellation 1Automatic cancellation

The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when Even though ACC has been automatically canceled,
ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the
automatically cancel: condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) press the RES/+ button.
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
Driving

the windshield, gets dirty.

440
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 441 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ To Switch ACC to Cruise Control 1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
Press and hold the (interval) button for one are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle
Cruise
ACC ON Control ON the multi-information display for two seconds, ahead of you.
and then the mode switches to Cruise and the
Cruise Mode indicator is displayed.
To switch back to ACC, press and hold the
button again for one second. ACC Mode
Selected appears on the multi-information
display for two seconds.

■ When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed

Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.

Continued 441
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 442 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

■ To Cancel 1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed:
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
• Press the CANCEL button. resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
• Press the MAIN button. button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
• Depress the brake pedal. km/h) or more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the MAIN button is turned off.

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise

control canceled automatically.
Driving

442
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 443 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system determines a possibility of your 1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings. Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
■ How the System Works limitations.
Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
The front camera behind the rearview mirror collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
monitors left and right lane markings (in white vehicle within your driving lane.
or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
to detected lane markings without a turn
detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
signal activated, the system, in addition to a system may not detect all lane markings or lane or
visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on
you with rapid vibrations on the steering weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is
wheel, to help you remain within the detected always your responsibility to safely operate the
lane. vehicle and avoid collisions.

You can read about handling information for the

As a visual alert, the Lane Departure

Driving
camera equipped with this system.
message appears on the multi-information 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427
display.
The RDM system may not work properly or may work
If the system determines that its steering input improperly under the certain conditions:
is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the 2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 445
roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.

Continued 443
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 444 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

■ How the System Activates 1How the System Activates

The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the indicator comes and stays on.
following conditions are met: 2 Indicators P. 84
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. RDM system function can be impacted when the
• The turn signals are off. vehicle is:
• The brake pedal is not depressed. • Not driven within a traffic lane.
• Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
a lane.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating, • Driven in a narrow lane.
braking or steering.

■ RDM On and Off 1RDM On and Off

When you have selected Warning Only from the
Press the RDM button to turn the system on customized options using the multi-information
and off. display, the system does not operate the steering
Driving

u The indicator in the button comes on and wheel and braking.

the message appears on the multi-
information display when the system is
on.
Indicator

RDM Button

444
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 445 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

■ RDM Conditions and Limitations

The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

Driving
Continued 445
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 446 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
Driving

■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.

446
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 447 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane. Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
■ Steering input assist substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and not work if you take your hands off the steering
right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
either of the lane lines. 2 Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 88
■ LKAS camera
Monitors the lane ■ Tactile and visual alerts
lines. Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel
Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent
and a warning display alert you that the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected

without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker

Driving
condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work

improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 452
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
You can read about handling information for the
() If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS
camera equipped with this system.
alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427

Continued 447
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 448 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ Lane Keep Support Function 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

The LKAS may not function as designed on while
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become with sharp curves.
stronger.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected,
system will recover automatically.

■ Lane Departure Warning Function

Driving

When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

Warning Area

Warning Area

448
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 449 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ When the System can be Used 1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
The system can be used when the following conditions are met. due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.

■ How to activate the system

1. Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the multi-information
display.
The system is ready to use.

Driving
MAIN Button

2. Press the LKAS button.

u Lane outlines appear on the multi-
information display.
The system is activated.

LKAS Button

Continued 449
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 450 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the 1When the System can be Used
lane while driving. The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to
u The dotted outer lines change to solid detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines
ones once the system starts operating again, it comes back on automatically.
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.

■ To cancel 1To cancel

Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.
To cancel the LKAS:
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
MAIN Button
The LKAS is turned off every time you turn the
Driving

power system off, even if you turned it on the

last time you drove the vehicle.

LKAS Button

450
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 451 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ The system operation is suspended if

you:
• Set the wipers to continuous operation.
u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
• Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the
wipers operate continuously.
When the LKAS is suspended, u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
the lane lines on the multi-
information display change to or operate intermittently.
contour lines, and the beeper All models
sounds. • Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40
mph (64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45
mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the

Driving
LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.

■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:

• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is quickly turned.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit.
• Driving through a sharp curve.
• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
Continued 451
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 452 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:

• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• The ABS or VSA system engages.
The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

■ LKAS Conditions and Limitations

The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:

■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving

• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

452
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 453 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.

Driving
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.

453
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 454 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), System 1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size
are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type
so by regulating motor output and selectively applying the brakes.
of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

■ VSA® Operation When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on

while driving, there may be a problem with the
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the system. While this may not interfere with normal
motor does not respond to the accelerator. driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
You may also notice some noise from the immediately.
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink. VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
VSA® System
Indicator margin of safety.
Driving

The main function of the VSA® system is generally

known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.

454
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 455 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

■ VSA® OFF Button 1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
This button is on the driver side control panel.
VSA® OFF Indicator With the button pressed, your vehicle will have
To partially turn the VSA features on and off, normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA®
press and hold it until you hear a beep. traction and stability enhancement becomes less
effective.
The traction control stops fully functioning,
allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come
to free it with the button pressed.
on.
When the button is pressed, the traction control
To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF) function becomes less effective. This allows for the
button until you hear a beep. wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the button
pressed if you are not able to free it without.
VSA® is turned on every time you turn the
power system on, even if you press the

Driving
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
button the last time you drove the vehicle. press the button again. We do not recommend
driving your vehicle with the button pressed
(indicator on).

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after turning the power
system on or while driving. This is normal.

455
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 456 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM

LaneWatchTM
Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas 1LaneWatchTM
displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the
passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas 3 WARNING
and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while
change lanes before doing so may result in
driving.
a crash and serious injury or death.
1 The system activates when you: 2
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
The passenger side view
Move the turn signal Press the LaneWatch display appears on the driving.
lever to the passenger button. audio/information screen.
side. Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
Driving

limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in

The system deactivates when you:
a collision.
Pull the turn signal Press the LaneWatch
lever back. button again. The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display

of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
Audio/Information Screen Camera • Your tires are over or under inflated.
• Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.

456
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 457 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM

■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings 1LaneWatchTM

You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen * or The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
audio/information touch screen *. lens makes objects on the screen look slightly
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when different from what they are.
you operate the turn signal light lever. LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
• Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch lever is in (R .
monitor.
• Display Time after Turn off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch display time For proper LaneWatch operation:
after you pull the turn signal lever back. • The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
• Display: Adjusts display settings. lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
2 Customized Features P. 295, 314 moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 188 • Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
■ Reference Lines
Three lines that appear on the screen can give 1Reference Lines

Driving
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.
3
2 that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away. The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
1
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.

Consult a dealer if:

• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

* Not available on all models 457

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 458 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle 1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each The system does not monitor the tires when driving
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are at low speed.
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
come on and a message to appear on the multi-information display. altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
■ TPMS Calibration Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
You must start TPMS calibration every time you: • Warm weather can become under-inflated in
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. colder weather.
• Rotate the tires. • Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
• Replace one or more tires. The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires. The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
2 Checking Tires P. 516
Driving

type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 516
Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• The shift lever is in (P . • You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
• The power mode is in ON. steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Snow chains are used.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on

under the following conditions:
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than
the condition at calibration.
• Snow chains are used.

458
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 459 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

1TPMS Calibration
You can calibrate the system from the • The calibration process requires approximately 30
customized features on the multi-information minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
display. 30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
1. Press the / 4 button to select Vehicle • During this period, if the power mode is set to ON
and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds,
Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button.
you may notice the low tire pressure indicator
u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.
comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that
2. Press the SEL/RESET button. the calibration process is not yet complete.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you You can calibrate the system using the audio/
can select Cancel or Calibrate. information screen * or audio/information touch
3. Press the / 4 button and select screen *.
2 Customized Features P. 295, 314
Calibrate, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u Calibration Started screen appears, If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
then the display returns to the calibrating the TPMS.

Driving
customization menu screen.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
• If the Calibration Failed to Start message when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
appears, repeat steps 2-3. installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
• The calibration process finishes
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
automatically. same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.

* Not available on all models 459

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 460 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
Driving

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.

460
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 461 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction

indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may

not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

Driving
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or

more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

461
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 462 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWhen DrivinguHigh Voltage Battery

High Voltage Battery

The High Voltage battery gradually discharges even if the vehicle is not in use. As a 1High Voltage Battery
result, if your vehicle is parked for an extended period of time, the battery charge Be careful not to let the High Voltage battery drain
level will become low. Extended periods of time at a low state of charge will shorten too much. If the battery level becomes close to zero,
battery life. To maintain the battery state of charge, drive your vehicle for more than it will make it impossible to start the engine.
30 minutes at least once every three months.
Extreme high temperatures can affect the battery life. You can minimize the effects
by parking the vehicle in the shade during the summer.
Driving

462
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 463 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Braking
Brake System
■ Parking Brake 1Brake System
When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
whirling sound from the motor compartment. This is
To apply: because the brake system is in operation, and it is
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the normal.
release button.
1Parking Brake
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.

To release: If you start driving without fully releasing the parking

1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release
the release button. Parking Brake appears on the multi-information
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then display.

Driving
release the button.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.

Continued 463
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 464 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Foot Brake 1Foot Brake

Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering pedal several times.
control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 466 If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 465 applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a

Driving

long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake

effectiveness. Apply regenerative braking by taking
your foot off the accelerator pedal and shifting to B .

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a

motor sound coming from the engine compartment
while the brake system activates. This is normal.

464
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 465 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

■ ABS 1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you. incorrect tire type and size.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading. there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always possibility of the ABS not operating. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.” The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
■ ABS operation during hard braking.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately

Driving
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops. • When snow chains are installed.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after turning the power
system on or while driving. This is normal.

465
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 466 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System

■ Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■ Brake assist system operation

Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
Driving

466
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 467 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a Important Safety Reminder
potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an
minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable. unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor
stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
■ How the system works wheel appropriately according to the driving
When to use conditions.
The camera is
located behind The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a
the rearview vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
mirror. conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 471

You can read about handling information for the

camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427

Driving
The radar sensor is Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly
at the lower part of impacted.
the front bumper.

1How the system works

Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3
mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you. when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph
(30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle
detected in front of you.
The CMBSTM activates when:
● The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected
When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically
in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a
apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
collision.
● Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a
stops or a potential collision is not determined.
collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.

Continued 467
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 468 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ When the system activates 1When the system activates

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect
The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and pedestrians.
stops if the collision is avoided. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
lanes, etc.) your vehicle under certain conditions.
Visual Alerts Head-up Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
Warning limitations from the list.
Lights 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 471

The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front

end of the dashboard.
Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.

Lens
Beep
Driving

Audible Alert Tactile Alert

At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/
Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through multi-
information display setting options.
2 List of customizable options P. 111

■ Vibration alert on the steering wheel

When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the 1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric
audible alerts. power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the 2 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator P. 79
steering wheel, etc.).

468
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 469 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ Collision Alert Stages

The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.

CMBSTM
Distance between vehicles The radar sensor
Audible & Visual WARNINGS Steering Wheel Braking
detects a vehicle

Normal
When in Long, visual and audible alerts In case of an
Vehicle
Long Short Ahead There is a risk of a come on at a longer distance from a oncoming vehicle
Stage
collision with the vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, detected, rapid —
one
vehicle ahead of you. and in Short, at a shorter distance than vibration is
Your Vehicle
in Normal. provided.

Your Vehicle The risk of a collision

Stage Lightly

Driving
Vehicle Ahead has increased, time to
two applied
respond is reduced.
Visual and audible alerts. —
The CMBSTM
Your Vehicle
Stage Vehicle Ahead determines that a Forcefully
three collision is applied
unavoidable.

Continued 469
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 470 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ CMBSTM On and Off 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the
Press this button until the beeper sounds to CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain
switch the system on or off. conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 471
When the CMBSTM is off:
• The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
• A message on the multi-information display
reminds you that the system is off.

The CMBSTM is in the previously selected ON or

OFF setting each time you turn the power
system on.
Driving

470
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 471 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 427

■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between objects and the background.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

Driving
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

Continued 471
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 472 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, etc.).
• When tire chains are installed.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• Driving with the parking brake applied.
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.

■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
Driving

• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.

472
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 473 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

• When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
• Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running.
• When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).

■ Automatic shutoff

Driving
The CMBS may automatically shut itself off and the CMBS indicator comes and stays
on when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.

Once the conditions that caused the CMBS to shut off improve or are addressed
(e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

Continued 473
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 474 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ With Little Chance of a Collision 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

For the CMBSTM to work properly:
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are: Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.

■ When Passing Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for

Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass. cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
■ At an intersection Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn. replace the radar sensor cover.

■ On a curve If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or

When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
vehicle is right in front of you. impacted, turn off the system by pressing the
CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

■ Through a low bridge at high speed

Driving

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any

You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed. unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
parking, stationary vehicles and walls.
• The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
• You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
• Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

474
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 475 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 1Parking Your Vehicle
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P . such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
4. Turn off the power system. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline. 1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the driveline:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.

When facing uphill, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal.
Doing so may cause the power system to overheat

Driving
and fail.

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake

may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

475
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 476 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System *

Parking Sensor System *

The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the 1Parking Sensor System *
beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is
between your vehicle and the obstacle. no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

■ The sensor location and range The system may not work properly when:
• The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or
Front Corner Sensors dirt.
Rear Corner Sensors Rear Center Sensors • The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
• The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
• The system is affected by devices that emit
ultrasonic waves.
• Driving in bad weather.

The system may not sense:

• Thin or low objects.
• Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
Driving

or sponge.
Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less • Objects directly under the bumper.

Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

476 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 477 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System *

■ Parking sensor system on and off 1Parking Sensor System *

With the power mode in ON, press the When you set the power mode to ON, the system will
parking sensor system button to turn on or off be in the previously selected condition.
the system. The indicator in the button comes
on when the system is on.

The rear center and corner sensors start to

detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in
(R , and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).

The front corner sensors start to detect an

obstacle when the shift lever is in any position
other than (P , and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Driving
* Not available on all models Continued 477
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 478 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System *

■ When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes
shorter

Length of the Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle

Indicator Audio/information screen
intermittent beep Corner Sensors Center Sensors

Rear: About 43-24 in

Moderate — Blinks in Yellow*1
(110-60 cm)
About 24-18 in About 24-18 in
Short
(60-45 cm) (60-45 cm) Indicators light where the
Blinks in Amber sensor detects an obstacle.
About 18-14 in About 18-14 in
Very short
(45-35 cm) (45-35 cm)
Driving

About 14 in About 14 in
Continuous Blinks in Red
(35 cm) or less (35 cm) or less

Indicators light where the

sensor detects an obstacle.

*1:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.

478
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 479 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System *

■ Turning off All Rear Sensors 1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you shift to (R , the indicator in the parking
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). rear sensors have been turned off.
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button blinks.
u The beeper sounds once.
4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.

To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds
three times when the rear sensors come back on.

Driving
479
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 480 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display 1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R . The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Wide View Mode Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
Guidelines high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
Bumper your vehicle.
Normal View Mode
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
Camera use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Driving

Approx. 39 inches (1 m) You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Top Down View Mode Guideline settings.
Approx. 79 inches (2 m) 2 Customized Features P. 295

Approx. 118 inches (3 m) Fixed Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.

480
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 481 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display.
Models with one display
Press the selector knob to switch the angle.
Models with two displays
Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle.
: Wide view
: Normal view
: Top down view

If the last used viewing mode is Wide view or Normal view, the same mode is
selected the next time you shift into (R . If Top down view was last used, Wide view
mode is selected.

If you shift out of (R in Top down view mode, then shift into (R again 10 seconds
later, Wide view mode is selected.

Driving
481
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 482 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation 1Fuel Information
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
that can lead to engine damage. engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
■ Top tier detergent gasoline control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent available.
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines. affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
Driving

oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol

additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
control system. another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■ Fuel tank capacity: 14.8 US gal (56 liters)

482
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 483 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station 1How to Refuel
Push
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear. 3 WARNING
2. Turn off the power system. Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at You can be burned or seriously injured
the foot of the driver’s seat. when handling fuel.
u The fuel fill door opens.
• Turn the power system off, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a • Handle fuel only outdoors.
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn • Wipe up spills immediately.
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.

Driving
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
Cap not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
Cap 5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
click off automatically. This leaves space automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands the full tank capacity.
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening
Holder it until you hear it click at least once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

483
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 484 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2
Emissions 1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several Direct calculation is the recommended method to
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
Gallons of Miles per
Miles driven
rated fuel economy of this vehicle. fuel Gallon

100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km

■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information on how this test is performed, please visit
multi-information display. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
Driving

adds weight and increases wind resistance.

484
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 485 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance Cooling System................................ 500 Wear Indicators ............................... 521
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 486 Inverter Coolant............................... 502 Tire Service Life................................ 521
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 487 Transmission Fluid............................ 503 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 522
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Brake Fluid....................................... 504 Tire Rotation.................................... 523
Service ........................................... 488 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 505 Winter Tires ..................................... 524
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 489 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 506 12-Volt Battery ................................. 525
Maintenance Under the Hood Checking and Maintaining Wiper Remote Transmitter Care
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 493 Blades .......................................... 514 Replacing the Button Battery ........... 526
Opening the Hood ........................... 494 Checking and Maintaining Tires Climate Control System Maintenance...527
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 495 Checking Tires ................................. 516 Cleaning
Oil Check ......................................... 496 Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 517 Interior Care .................................... 528
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 497 Tire Labeling .................................... 517 Exterior Care.................................... 530
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 498 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......519 Accessories and Modifications ........ 533

485
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 486 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle 1Inspection and Maintenance
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient U.S. models
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in emissions control devices and systems may be
effect.) done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
■ Daily inspections
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when items marked with # will not void your emissions
refueling. warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
■ Periodic inspections indicated by the multi-information display (MID).
• Check the brake fluid level monthly. 2 Maintenance Service Items P. 491
2 Brake Fluid P. 504
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 516 subscription to the Service Express website at
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 506 2 Authorized Manuals P. 573
Maintenance

• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 514 If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.

486
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 487 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. 1Safety When Performing Maintenance
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform 3 WARNING
a given task. Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
■ Maintenance Safety can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the 12-volt battery and all fuel related parts. Always follow the inspection and
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. maintenance recommendations according
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire. to the schedules in this owner's manual.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12-volt 3 WARNING
battery or compressed air. Failure to properly follow maintenance
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. instructions and precautions can cause you
u Operate operate the engine only when there is sufficient ventilation. to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and

■ Vehicle Safety

Maintenance
precautions in this owner's manual.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the power system is turned off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the power system including the engine and exhaust system
cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not activate the power system unless instructed, and keep your hands and
limbs away from moving parts. When the power system is on, the engine can
automatically start, or the radiator fan may start operating without the engine
running.
487
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 488 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
Maintenance

488
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 489 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Maintenance MinderTM

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the multi-information display every time you set the power mode to ON.
The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1. Set the power mode to ON. Based on the engine operating conditions, the
2. Press the (Information) button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
on the multi-information display. as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil Calculated Engine Oil
Maintenance Life (%) Life (%)
Item Codes 100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
Remaining 80 80 to 71
Engine Oil
70 70 to 61
Life
60 60 to 51

Maintenance
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
Button 20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0

Continued 489
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 490 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information

Display
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to The engine oil is approaching the end
6 percent. Once you switch the of its service life, and the maintenance
display by pressing the items should be inspected and serviced
(Information) button, this message soon.
will go off.

Maintenance Due Now 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the button to end of its service life, and the
switch to another display. maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance

Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed.
passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be
distance appears after driving over inspected and serviced immediately.
10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another
display.

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

490
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 491 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Service Items 1Maintenance Service Items

• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Maintenance Minder
Message • Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
System Message
Indicator km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

Main Item Sub Items

CODE Maintenance Main Items CODE Maintenance Sub Items

A ● Replace engine oil*1 1 ● Rotate tires
B ● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter 2 ● Replace air cleaner element*2
● Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary ● Replace dust and pollen filter*3
● Check parking brake adjustment 3 ● Replace transmission fluid*4
● Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots 4 ● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect suspension components ● Inspect valve clearance

Maintenance
● Inspect driveshaft boots 5 ● Replace engine coolant
● Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
● Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
● Inspect exhaust system# from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
● Inspect fuel lines and connections# This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
● Check expiration date for TRK bottle Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 47,500 miles (75,000 km) or 3 years.
*1: If a message Service does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

Continued 491
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 492 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Resetting the Display 1Resetting the Display

NOTICE
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
Maintenance Item Codes
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
(Information)
Button mechanical problems.
SEL/RESET
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
Button
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
Engine Oil Life
You can reset the engine oil life display using the
1. Set the power mode to ON. audio/information screen * or audio/information
touch screen *.
2. Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the SEL/RESET
2 Customized Features P. 295, 314
button.
3. Press the button until Maintenance Reset appears on the display.
4. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
Maintenance

5. Select Reset with the button, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.

To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then press the SEL/RESET button.

492 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 493 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)

Inverter Coolant
Engine Oil Dipstick Filler Tank
(Orange)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap) 12-Volt Battery

Maintenance
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

493
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 494 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set 1Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle
the parking brake. NOTICE
2. Pull the hood release handle under the Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
lower left corner of the dashboard. raised.
u The hood will pop up slightly. The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
Pull
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.

3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
of the hood to release the lock mechanism, open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
and open the hood. mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Lever
Maintenance

Support Rod 4. Remove the support rod from the clamp

using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
Grip
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
Clamp
hood close.

494
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 495 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

• Genuine Honda Motor Oil 1Recommended Engine Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the Engine Oil Additives
container. Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's and durability.
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving

and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.

Use Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another

commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown here.

Maintenance
Ambient Temperature

■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.

495
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 496 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. 1Oil Check
Park the vehicle on level ground. If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
Turn off the power system. You can check the oil level without the engine having add oil being careful not to overfill.
run beforehand. If the engine has been running, wait approximately three minutes
before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the

level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Maintenance

Upper Mark
Lower Mark

496
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 497 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 1Adding Engine Oil
2. Add oil slowly. If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten may damage the engine compartment components.
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the NOTICE
engine oil dipstick. Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
Engine Oil Fill Cap

Maintenance
497
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 498 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly. NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
Turning the power system on automatically starts the engine if the High Voltage dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
battery charge level gauge shows two segments or less. changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
2 High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge P. 99 the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the multi-
information display.

1. Remove the engine under cover.

Maintenance

2. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
3. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
Washer fill cap.
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into
Drain Bolt
a suitable container.

498
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 499 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
remaining oil. You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it. When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Oil Filter 7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
install a new oil filter. low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
the oil gasket. your work.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):

Maintenance
4.0 US qt (3.8 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

499
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 500 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduCooling System

Cooling System
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 1Cooling System
NOTICE
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
straight antifreeze or water. antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
details.

■ Reserve Tank If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may

use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
Reserve
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
Tank tank. coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
MAX possible.
MIN
Maintenance

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, with the coolant or with the engine components.
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

500
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 501 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduCooling System

■ Radiator 1Radiator

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are 3 WARNING

cool. Removing the radiator cap while the
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
relieve any pressure in the cooling system. out, seriously scalding you.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap Always let the engine and radiator cool
counterclockwise to remove it. down before removing the radiator cap.
Radiator Cap 4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
NOTICE
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
fully. any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it damage components in the engine compartment.
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.

Maintenance
501
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 502 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduInverter Coolant

Inverter Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 1Inverter Coolant
NOTICE
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
straight antifreeze or water. antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
We recommend you check the inverter coolant level every time you refuel. Check vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
the filler tank. Add the inverter coolant accordingly. below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
Have a dealer replace the inverter coolant. details.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may

■ Checking the Coolant use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
1. Make sure the inverter is cool.
Filler coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Tank 2. Check the amount of coolant in the filler Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
tank. in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
3. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
add the specified coolant until it reaches and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
the MAX mark. possible.
MAX
4. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
MIN
Maintenance

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the motor components.

502
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 503 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid) 1Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary. Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle's transmission, and may
even damage it.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda's new vehicle warranty.

Maintenance
503
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 504 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 1Brake Fluid
NOTICE
■ Checking the Brake Fluid Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
Brake Reservoir
The fluid level should be between the MIN damage.
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
MAX If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion

and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
MIN brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,

have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
Maintenance

504
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 505 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir. 1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir. NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
Canadian models solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
on the multi-information display. vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Maintenance
505
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 506 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. 1Headlight Bulbs
High beam headlight: LED type * Models with halogen headlights

High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type) * NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Low beam headlight: LED type * Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type) * the bulb to overheat and shatter.

■ High Beam Headlights All models

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
Models with halogen headlights need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
Passenger side heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
Holding
Clips 1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
upper part of the air intake duct.
Models with halogen headlights
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

1High Beam Headlights

Maintenance

2. Remove the reserve tank. Models with LED headlights

High beam headlights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.

506 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 507 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

Bulb Both sides 1High Beam Headlights

3. Push the tab to remove the coupler. Models with halogen headlights
Coupler 4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight pin to remove the clip.
assembly and turn it to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the Center pin
bulb.
Tab

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Maintenance
Push until the
pin is flat.

Continued 507
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 508 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Lights

■ Low Beam Headlights 1Low Beam Headlights

Models with LED headlights
Models with halogen headlights
Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
opposite side from the light being replaced. assembly.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
Models with halogen headlights
to the left.
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the pin to remove the clip.
right.
2. Remove the holding clip and screw, and Center pin
Holding pull the inner fender back.
Screw Clip
3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Tab 4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
Bulb bulb.
Coupler
Maintenance

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Fog Lights Push until the

pin is flat.
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.

508
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 509 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs

Models with LED headlights

Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Side Marker Light: 3 CP

Turn the steering wheel and pull the inner fender back in the same way as when
replacing the halogen low beam headlight bulbs *.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 508
1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Bulb Socket

Models with LED headlights

Maintenance
Front Turn Signal Lights
Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

* Not available on all models 509

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 510 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

Models with halogen headlights

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W (Amber)

Turn the steering wheel and pull the inner fender back in the same way as when
replacing the halogen low beam headlight bulbs *.
2 Low Beam Headlights P. 508
1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Socket
Bulb

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights

Maintenance

Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.

510 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 511 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light, and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light, and Rear Side

Marker Light Bulbs 1Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light, and Rear Side Marker
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Light Bulbs
Brake/taillights and rear side marker lights are LED
Brake/Taillight: LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber) replace the light assembly.
Rear Side Marker Light: LED
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
Holding Clip 1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip then lift and remove the clip.
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

Clip

Bulb 2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is

Maintenance
flat.

Push until the

Socket pin is flat.

511
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 512 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs. 1Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Back-Up Light: 16 W Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda
Taillight: LED dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip

screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2 Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light,
and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
P. 511

Holding Clip

2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Bulb
Maintenance

Socket

512
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 513 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
1. Remove the license plate light assembly by
pushing the left edge of the lens toward the
right and pulling the assembly out.

2. Remove the lens by pushing the tabs.

3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Tab

Bulb

Maintenance
Lens

High-Mount Brake Light

High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

513
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 514 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber 1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
passenger side.
windshield.

Tab 2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the holder
off the wiper arm.
Maintenance

514
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 515 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by

pulling the tabbed end out.

Blade

Top 4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade

Retainer that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
Blade
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.

Maintenance
Indent
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
6. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm, then
push down the lock tab.
Tab 7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.

515
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 516 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in 1Checking Tires
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
3 WARNING
■ Inflation guidelines Using tires that are excessively worn or
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. improperly inflated can cause a crash in
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure. which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and Follow all instructions in this owner’s
are more likely to fail from overheating. manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly. Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge. necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
kgf/cm2) per month.
Maintenance

checked when cold.

■ Inspection guidelines Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must

Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. calibrate the TPMS.
Look for: 2 TPMS Calibration P. 458
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
balanced.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 521
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
516
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 517 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Tire and Loading Information Label

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading 1Tire and Loading Information Label
information. The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
Label a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
Example b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front and rear.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front and rear.

Tire Labeling 1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an
The tires that came on your vehicle have a explanation of what each component means.
Example Tire Size
Tire number of markings. Those you should be 225/50R17 94V
Identification aware of are described below. 225: Tire width in millimeters.
Number (TIN) 50: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).

Maintenance
Maximum R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
Tire Load
17: Rim diameter in inches.
Maximum 94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
Tire Pressure maximum load the tire can carry).
Tire Size V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
■ Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

Continued 517
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 518 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

■ Tire Identification Number (TIN) 1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire. requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
■ Glossary of Tire Terminology B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at 22 09: Date of manufacture.
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given Year
Week
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
Maintenance

518
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 519 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.

■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading 1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example:
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
Treadwear 200
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Traction AA
Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear All passenger car tires must conform
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a to Federal Safety Requirements in
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 addition to these grades.
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

Maintenance
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

Continued 519
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 520 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

■ Traction 1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
assigned to this tire is based on
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
and does not include acceleration,
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
C may have poor traction performance.
traction characteristics.

■ Temperature 1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
this tire is established for a tire that is
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
properly inflated and not
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
overloaded. Excessive speed,
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
underinflation, or excessive loading,
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
either separately or in combination,
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
can cause heat buildup and possible
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
tire failure.
Maintenance

all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

520
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 521 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is 1Checking Tires
Example of a Wear located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than High speed driving
Indicator mark elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),
adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to
roads.
avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size 225/50R17 94V
Pressure 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)

Tire Service Life

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is

recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of

Maintenance
manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

521
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 522 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and 1Tire and Wheel Replacement
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) 3 WARNING
system to work incorrectly. Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
front or rear tires in pairs. killed.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
Maintenance

522
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 523 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the multi-information 1Tire Rotation
display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life. Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
■ Tires without rotation marks Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
Rotate the tires as shown here. indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front FRONT

Direction Mark

■ Tires with rotation marks

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
Rotate the tires as shown here.
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 458

Maintenance
Front

523
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 524 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, 1Winter Tires
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving. 3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent installing chains, can damage the brake
skidding. lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
When mounting, refer to the following points. manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. NOTICE
• Mount the tires to all four wheels. Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
For tire chains: installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
• Install them on the front tires only. suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the hitting any part of the vehicle.
chains listed below:
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
Maintenance

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036 manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle

operational limits.
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. aware that these tires are not designed for winter
• Drive slowly. driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.

524
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 525 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

12-Volt Battery
Checking the 12-Volt Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a 112-Volt Battery
sensor located on the negative terminal of the
battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, 3 WARNING
the multi-information display will display a The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
warning message. If this happens, have you gas during normal operation.
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
Check the battery terminals for corrosion explode with enough force to kill or
monthly. seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery

If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
• The audio system is disabled.
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 187
it.
• The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 118
• The navigation system * is disabled. WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.

Maintenance
Charging the 12-Volt Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system. When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be

of the same specifications.
Please consult a dealer for more information.

* Not available on all models 525

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 526 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. 1Replacing the Button Battery
Battery type: CR2032 NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
1. Remove the built-in key. environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or

at a dealer.

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by

carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
Battery buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Maintenance

526
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 527 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Climate Control System Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects 1Dust and Pollen Filter
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let If the airflow from the climate control system
you know when to replace the filter. deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your contact a dealer for replacement.
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

Maintenance
527
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 528 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. 1Interior Care
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue. Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
■ Cleaning Seat Belts liquids are splashed on them.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth. such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may
cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside
the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently
used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Opening Depending on their composition, chemicals and

liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them

away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Maintenance

■ Cleaning the Window 1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe using a glass cleaner. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.

528
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 529 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCleaninguInterior Care

■ Floor Mats 1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally
The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
Unlock
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
the anchor knobs to the unlock position. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
the knobs to the lock position.
Lock

Do not put additional floor mats on top of

the anchored mat.

■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *

Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

Maintenance
* Not available on all models 529
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 530 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

■ Washing the Vehicle 1Washing the Vehicle

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following cause a malfunction.
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

■ Using an Automated Car Wash

• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
Air Intake Vents
• Turn off the automatic intermittent wipers *.

■ Using High Pressure Cleaners

Maintenance

• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

530 * Not available on all models

17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 531 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Applying Wax 1Applying Wax

NOTICE
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
elements, so reapply as necessary. away spills immediately.

■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts 1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and made of resin.
clean water.

■ Cleaning the Window

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road

Maintenance
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.

Continued 531
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 532 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses

The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.

Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.

However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Maintenance

532
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 533 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following: 1Accessories and Modifications
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions. 3 WARNING
• Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs Improper accessories or modifications can
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the performance, and cause a crash in which
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags you can be seriously hurt or killed.
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with Follow all instructions in this owner's
proper operation of your vehicle. manual regarding accessories and
2 Fuses P. 558 modifications.
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation. Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

Maintenance
533
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 534 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications

Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or 1Modifications
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect. 3 WARNING
Use of improperly designed, engineered or
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. manufactured high-voltage battery
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not assemblies could cause a fire in your
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle vehicle.
to no longer meet federal, state, provincial, territorial, or local regulations.
A vehicle fire could result in a crash or
Do not modify or attempt to repair your vehicle’s high-voltage hybrid power system injury.
or otherwise modify vehicle electrical systems. Disassembling or modifying electrical
Only use a genuine Honda high-voltage
equipment can result in a crash or a fire.
battery assembly, or its equivalent, in your
vehicle.
If you ever need to replace your vehicle's high-voltage battery assembly outside of
warranty coverage, we highly recommend that you only use a genuine Honda high-
voltage battery assembly. Genuine Honda high-voltage battery assemblies are
designed to work with your vehicle's hybrid power system and have been designed,
engineered and manufactured to avoid overcharging situations. Non-genuine
Maintenance

highvoltage battery assemblies may not have been similarly designed, engineered
and manufactured, and installation of such assemblies could result in overcharging,
fires, loss of power, or other conditions that may increase the likelihood of a crash
or injury.

534
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 535 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

If a Tire Goes Flat Overheating If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire....... 536 How to Handle Overheating............. 551 Indicator Comes On............................556
Power System Won’t Start Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Checking the Procedure ................... 545 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes Comes On or Blinks ....................... 557
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is On ............................................. 554 Fuses
Weak..........................................546 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Fuse Locations ................................. 558
Emergency Power System Off........... 547 Indicator Comes On ....................... 554 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 560
Jump Starting.................................... 548 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes Emergency Towing........................... 561
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 550 On or Blinks ................................... 555
If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On.................................. 556

535
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 536 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

If a Tire Goes Flat

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
This vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire. If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise 1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
severely damaged, you will need to have the vehicle towed. If the tire only has a The kit should not be used in the following situations.
small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can use the temporary tire repair kit so Instead, contact a dealer or roadside assistance to
that you can drive to the nearest service station for a more permanent repair. have the vehicle towed.
• The tire sealant has expired.
• More than one tire is punctured.
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
• The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm).
to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place. • The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is
outside the tire contact area.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
When the puncture is: Kit Use
2. Move the shift lever to (P .
Handling the Unexpected

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF Smaller than 3/16 inch
Yes
(LOCK). (4 mm)
Contact
Area Larger than 3/16 inch
No
(4 mm)

• Damage has been caused by driving with the tire

extremely under inflated.
• The tire bead is no longer seated.
• The rim is damaged.

Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the

tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be
able to repair the puncture using the kit.

536
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 537 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

■ Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire 1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
When making a temporary repair, carefully read the
Pressure Gauge AIR ONLY side instruction manual provided with the kit.

Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) Inflator Switch In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.
In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
Tire Sealant using.
Expiration Date
Pressure Relief
Button Power Plug
Instruction Manual Selector Switch
SEALANT/AIR side

Handling the Unexpected

Air Only Hose (Black)

Repair Notification Label Speed Restriction Label

U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada

Trunk Floor Lid 1. Open the trunk floor lid.

2. Take the kit out of the case.
3. Place the kit face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.

Tire Repair Kit

Continued 537
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 538 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

■ Injecting Sealant and Air 1Injecting Sealant and Air

Valve Cap 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve 3 WARNING
stem. Tire sealant contains substances that are
harmful and can be fatal if swallowed.

If accidentally swallowed, do not induce

vomiting. Drink plenty of water and get
medical attention immediately.

Valve Stem For skin or eye contact, flush with cool

water and get medical attention if
Handling the Unexpected

Sealant/Air Hose 2. Remove the sealant/air hose from the

packaging. necessary.

In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.

In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
using.

The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other

materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away
any spills immediately.
Sealant/Air Hose 3. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire
valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.

Valve Stem

538
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 539 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory 1Injecting Sealant and Air

power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a 3 WARNING
door or window. Running the engine with the vehicle in an
5. Turn the power system on. enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause
u Keep the power system on while a rapid build-up of toxic carbon monoxide.
injecting sealant and air.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 70 Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
6. Turn the selector switch to SEALANT/ Only run the engine to power the air
AIR. compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

Handling the Unexpected

NOTICE
Do not operate the tire repair kit compressor for
more than 15 minutes. The accessory power socket
and compressor can overheat and become
permanently damaged.
SEALANT/AIR side
Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure
Pressure Gauge 7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than
compressor. actual. After the sealant injection is complete the
u The compressor starts injecting sealant pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the
tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately
and air into the tire.
measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air
8. When the sealant injection is complete, compressor off only after the sealant injection is
ON
continue to add air. complete.
9. After the air pressure reaches front: 33 psi
OFF (230 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (225 kPa), turn off If the required air pressure is not reached within 10
minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for
the kit.
the kit to provide the necessary seal, and your vehicle
u To check the pressure, occasionally turn will need to be towed.
off the compressor and read the gauge.
Continued 539
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 540 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Sealant/Air Hose 10. Unplug the power plug from the accessory 1Injecting Sealant and Air
power socket. See a dealer for a replacement sealant bottle and
11. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire proper disposal of an empty bottle.
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
12. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns 0 psi (0 kPa).

Valve Stem

Repair Notification Label 13. Apply the repair notification label to the
U.S. flat surface of the wheel.
Handling the Unexpected

u The wheel surface must be clean to

ensure the label adheres properly.

Canada

540
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 541 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

■ Distributing the Sealant in the Tire 1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire

U.S.
1. Apply the speed restriction label to the 3 WARNING
location as shown.
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
3. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Canada monoxide.

Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can

cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air

Handling the Unexpected

4. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
stem. Screw it until it is tight.
5. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY.
u Do not turn the air compressor on to Stop and recheck the air pressure after every 10
check the pressure. minutes of driving as necessary until you reach the
2 Inflating An Under-inflated Tire P. 543 nearest service station where you are able to have the
tire permanently repaired or replaced.

Air Only Hose

Continued 541
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 542 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

6. If the air pressure is:

• Less than 19 psi (130 kPa):
Do not add air or continue driving. The leak is too severe. Call for help and
have your vehicle towed.
2 Emergency Towing P. 561
• Front: 33 psi (230 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (225 kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or until you reach the nearest service
station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not
reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.
u If the pressure does not go down after the 10 minute driving, you do not need
to check the pressure any more.
• Greater than 19 psi (130 kPa), but less than front: 33 psi (230 kPa)/rear: 33 psi
(225 kPa):
Handling the Unexpected

Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front:
33 psi (230 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (225 kPa).
Then drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you reach the nearest service
station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not
reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.
u You should repeat this procedure as long as the air pressure is within this
range.
7. Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
8. Repackage and properly stow the kit.

542
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 543 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

■ Inflating An Under-inflated Tire 1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire

NOTICE
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
1. Open the trunk floor lid. compressor for more than 15 minutes. The accessory
2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair
power socket and compressor can overheat and
the Flat Tire P. 537 become permanently damaged.
2. Remove the kit from the case.
u Place the kit on flat ground near the tire
to be inflated, away from traffic.
3. Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, away from traffic. Do not
Air Only Hose place the kit on its side.

Handling the Unexpected

4. Remove the air only hose from the kit.
5. Remove the valve cap.

Valve Cap

Air Only Hose 6. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve
stem. Screw it until it is tight.

Valve Stem
Continued 543
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 544 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

7. Plug in the kit to the accessory power 1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire

socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a 3 WARNING
door or window. Running the engine with the vehicle in an
8. Turn the power system on. enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
u Keep the power system on while cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
injecting sealant and air. monoxide.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 70
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
9. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY. cause unconsciousness and even death.
AIR ONLY
side 10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. Only run the engine to power the air
Handling the Unexpected

u The compressor starts to inject air into compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
the tire.
11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.
ON

12. Turn off the kit.

u Check the pressure gauge on the air
compressor.
u If overinflated, press the pressure relief
button.
13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
14. Unscrew the air only hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
Pressure Relief Button 15. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns 0 psi (0 kPa).
16. Repackage and properly stow the kit.

544
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 545 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Power System Won’t Start

Checking the Procedure
When the READY indicator does not come on and the Ready to Drive message 1Checking the Procedure
does not appear on the multi-information display, check the following items and If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
take appropriate action. assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 548

Checklist Condition What to Do

Check if the related The Temperature is Too Cold For Vehicle To Operate 2 Multi-Information Display Warning and
indicator or multi- message appears. Information Messages P. 88
information display The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
messages come on. appears. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Handling the Unexpected

uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range. P. 546
2 POWER Button Operating Range P. 141
The POWER SYSTEM indicator comes on. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Check the brightness The interior lights are dim or do not come on at all. Have the 12-volt battery checked by a dealer.
of the interior lights. The interior lights come on normally. Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 560
Check the shift lever The shift lever is not in (P or (N . Move the shift lever to the (P position.
position.
Check the When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the power
immobilizer system system cannot be turned on. 2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 82
indicator.

545
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 546 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuPower System Won’t StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears on the multi-information display, and the indicator on the POWER button
flashes, the READY indicator does not come on.

Turn on the power system as follows.

1. Touch the center of the POWER button
with the H logo on the smart entry remote
while the indicator on the POWER button is
flashing. The buttons on the smart entry
remote should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
Handling the Unexpected

seconds.

2. Depress the brake pedal and press the

POWER button within 10 seconds after the
beeper sounds and the indicator stays on.
u The READY indicator comes on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.

546
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 547 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuPower System Won’t StartuEmergency Power System Off

Emergency Power System Off

The POWER button may be used to turn the power system off due to an emergency 1Emergency Power System Off
situation even while driving. If you must turn the power system off, do either of the Do not press the button while driving unless it is
following operations: absolutely necessary for the power system to be
• Press and hold the POWER button for about two seconds. turned off.
• Firmly press the POWER button twice.

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the power system
disables the power assist the power system provides to the steering and braking
systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow
the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop
immediately in a safe place.

Handling the Unexpected

U.S. models
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the power system is off.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Canadian models
Then press the POWER button twice without depressing the brake pedal.

547
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 548 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Jump Starting

■ Jump Starting Procedure 1Jump Starting

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the power 3 WARNING
system, then open the hood. A 12-volt battery can explode if you do not
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your follow the correct procedure, seriously
vehicle's 12-volt battery + terminal. injuring anyone nearby.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal. Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. materials away from the 12-volt battery.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery, Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
Handling the Unexpected

Booster Battery
select a lower charging voltage than 15- do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
volt. Check the charger manual for the careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
proper setting. cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the detaching the jumper cables.
booster battery - terminal.
12-volt battery performance degrades in cold
conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable
to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

548
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 549 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuJump Startingu

■ What to Do After the Engine Starts

Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's 12-volt battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.

Handling the Unexpected

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

549
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 550 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Shift Lever Does Not Move

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.

■ Releasing the Lock

1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
Slot tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
Handling the Unexpected

remove the cover.

Cover
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift
lever into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
Shift Lock
possible.
Release
Slot
Release Button

550
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 551 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The High Temperature. Power Reduced. message appears on the multi-
information display.
• The Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on the multi-information
display.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

■ The High Temperature. Power Reduced. Message Appears

on the Multi-Information Display
The High Temperature. Power Reduced. message appears on the multi-

Handling the Unexpected

information display when the power system temperature is high.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages P. 96
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
u Move the shift lever to (P , and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories
and turn on the hazard warning lights.
2. Keep the power mode on, and wait until the message disappears.
u If the message does not disappear, have your vehicle inspected at a dealer.

Continued 551
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 552 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ The Engine Temperature Too Hot Message Appears on the 1The Engine Temperature Too Hot Message Appears on the Multi-
Multi-Information Display Information Display

■ First thing to do 3 WARNING

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
Steam and spray from an overheated
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
engine can seriously scald you.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the power system on and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the power system and wait until it Do not open the hood if steam is coming
subsides. Then open the hood. out.

NOTICE
Handling the Unexpected

Continuing to drive with the Engine Temperature

Too Hot message on the multi-information display
may damage the engine.

552
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 553 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ Next thing to do 1The Engine Temperature Too Hot Message Appears on the Multi-
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and Information Display
Engine
Coolant turn the power system off once the Engine
Reserve Temperature Too Hot message 3 WARNING
Tank disappears. Removing the radiator cap while the
u If the cooling fan is not operating, engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
immediately turn the power system off. out, seriously scalding you.
MAX 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling Always let the engine and radiator cool
MIN
system components for leaks. down before removing the radiator cap.
u If the coolant level in the engine coolant

Handling the Unexpected

reserve tank is low, add coolant until it If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
reaches the MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.

■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, turn the power system on.
If the Engine Temperature Too Hot message does not appear, resume driving. If
it appears again, contact a dealer for repairs.

553
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 554 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on 1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. NOTICE
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Turn the power system off and let the engine sit for about three
minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Turn the power system on and check the low oil pressure indicator.
Handling the Unexpected

u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.

u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Turn the power
off and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator

Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the 12-volt battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

554
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 555 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or

Blinks 1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink NOTICE

• Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again next
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a time the engine starts, drive to the nearest dealer at
dealer. 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks inspected.
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

Handling the Unexpected

■ Tighten Fuel Cap Message
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.

■ What to do when the message appears:

1. Turn the power system off.
2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.

555
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 556 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

U.S. ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on 1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
• The brake fluid is low. Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
Canada ■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
the transmission.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator
transmission to slow the vehicle using regenerative braking. come on simultaneously, the electronic brake
distribution system is not working. This can result in
vehicle instability under sudden braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
Handling the Unexpected

Comes On
If both red and amber brake system indicators come
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it
• Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system. inspected by a dealer immediately.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn on the power system again.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

556
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 557 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or

Blinks 1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink NOTICE
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

Handling the Unexpected

■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible.

557
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 558 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set Circuit Protected Amps Circuit Protected Amps
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, and check
Headlight Low Beam Main 30 A 18 Interior Light 7.5 A
to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Engine Electric Water Pump 30 A 19 − −
3
IG Main 2 30 A 20 Premium Amp * (20 A)
■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box Wiper Motor 30 A 21 Back Up 10 A
Located near the 12-volt battery. Push the 4 FI Main 15 A 22 Audio 15 A
tabs to open the box.
5 PCU Electric Water Pump 7.5 A 23 P-ACT Drive * (7.5 A)
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the 6 EVTC 20 A 24 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A
fuse number and box cover number. 7 IG Hold 10 A 25 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A
8 DBW 15 A 26 IGPS LAF 10 A
Handling the Unexpected

9 IG Coil 15 A
10 Stop Light 10 A
11 VBU 10 A
Fuse Box Main 2 60 A
Rear Defogger 50 A
Fuse Box Main 1 60 A
ABS/VSA FSR 40 A
Fuse Box 30 A
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 12
ABS/VSA Motor 30 A
Circuit Protected Amps Heater Motor 40 A
1 Battery 150 A Left EPB * (30 A)
EPS 70 A Small Light 20 A
ESB 40 A Fuse Box Option 2 40 A
Right EPB * (30 A) 13 A/C PTC 4 (40 A)
2 Fuse Box Option 1 40 A 14 A/CPTC 2 (40 A)
Shift By Wire * (30 A) 15 Front Fog Light + DRL (10 A)
RFC 40 A 16 Horn 10 A
IG Main 1 30 A 17 IG Hold 3-L/R 15 A
558 * Not available on all models
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 559 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Interior Fuse Box Circuit Protected Amps Circuit Protected Amps

10 ABS/VSA 7.5 A Front Passenger’s Power
Located under the dashboard. 33 20 A
11 VB SOL 10 A Window
12 Front Wiper 7.5 A Rear Driver Side Power
34 20 A
13 ACG 10 A Window
Rear Accessory Power Socket Rear Passenger Side Power
14 20 A 35 20 A
(Console Compartment) Window
Driver’s Power Seat 36 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding (20 A)
15 (20 A)
Reclining 37 ACCESSORY 7.5 A
Fuse Label 38 − −
16 Moonroof * (20 A)
17 Front Seat Heaters (20 A) 39 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse locations are shown on the label on 18 − − Front Accessory Power
Passenger Side Door 40 Socket 20 A
the side panel. 19 10 A
Unlock (Console Panel)
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
Driver Side Rear Door 41 Driver Side Rear Door Lock 10 A
number and label number. 20 10 A
Unlock 42 Door Lock 20 A
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 21 Driver’s Door Lock 10 A a SMART 10 A
22 Passenger Side Door Lock 10 A b SHIFTER * (7.5 A)
Circuit Protected Amps c Hybrid System 10 A
23 Driver’s Door Unlock 10 A
1 A/C 7.5 A d Hazard 15 A
24 SRS 10 A
2 DRL 7.5 A Passenger's Power Seat
25 Illumination 10 A
3 − − e (20 A)
26 Key Lock 7.5 A Reclining *
4 − − Passenger's Power Seat
27 Parking Lights 10 A f (20 A)
5 Meter 10 A Sliding *
28 Lumbar Support (10 A)
6 SRS (7.5 A) g Rear Seat Heaters * (15 A)
29 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
7 Option (7.5 A) h ACL * (15 A)
30 Washer 15 A
8 − − i − −
31 A/C Main 10 A
9 Fuel Pump 20 A j IG MON * 7.5 A
32 Driver’s Power Window 20 A
* Not available on all models 559
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 560 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

Screw
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF 1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
(LOCK). Turn headlights and all accessories NOTICE
Blown Fuse off. Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
2. Remove the fuse box cover. greatly increases the chances of damaging the
3. Check the large fuse in the engine electrical system.
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Combined screwdriver to remove the screw and
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
Fuse replace it with a new one. P. 558 to 559.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
Fuse Puller compartment and the vehicle interior. There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
Handling the Unexpected

u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it compartment fuse box cover.

with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.

560
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 561 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. 1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
■ Flat bed equipment Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. to support the vehicle's weight.

■ Wheel lift equipment NOTICE

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off Improper towing such as towing behind a
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
tow your vehicle.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.

Handling the Unexpected

It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.

561
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 562 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

562
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 563 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 564 Emissions Testing

Identification Numbers Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 569
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Warranty Coverages ........................ 571
Number, and Motor Number........... 566 Authorized Manuals......................... 573
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 567 Customer Service Information......... 574
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 568

563
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 564 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Specifications

■ Vehicle Specifications ■ Engine Specifications ■ Light Bulbs

Model Honda Accord Hybrid Displacement 126 cu-in (1,993 cm3) 55W (H11)*1
Headlights (Low Beam)
No. of Passengers: Spark Plugs NGK ILZKAR7E11S LED*2
Front 2 ■ Fuel Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)*1
Rear 3 LED*2
Fuel: Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
Total 5 Fog Lights LED
Type of 87 or higher
Weights: Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED
Fuel Tank Capacity 14.8 US gal (56 ℓ)
Gross Vehicle U.S.: 4,542 lbs (2,060 kg) Front Turn Signal/Side Marker
■ Washer Fluid Lights*1
28/8 W (Amber)
Weight Rating Canada: 2,060 kg
Gross Axle Weight U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ) Front Turn Signal Lights*2 LED
Tank Capacity
Rating (Front) Canada: 4.5 ℓ Front Side Marker Lights*2 3CP
U.S.: 2,414 lbs (1,095 kg)
Canada: 1,095 kg Side Turn Signal Lights
LED
Gross Axle Weight (on Door Mirrors)
Rating (Rear) U.S.: 2,161 lbs (980 kg) Brake/Taillights LED
Canada: 980 kg Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Air Conditioning: Taillights LED
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Back-Up Lights 16W
Charge Quantity 13.6 – 15.3 oz (385 – 435 g) Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL 11 High-Mount Brake Light LED
Quantity 7.3 – 8.2 cu-in (120 – 135 cm3) Rear License Plate Lights 5W
Trunk Light 5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W
Information

Ceiling Light 8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
Courtesy Lights 2CP
*1: Models with halogen headlights
*2: Models with LED headlights

564
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 565 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake Fluid ■ Engine Oil ■ Tire

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 Size 225/50R17 94V
Recommended
■ Transmission Fluid ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Pressure
Change 3.7 US qt (3.5 ℓ) Regular psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Honda ATF DW-1
Specified Change Front 33 (230 [2.3])
(automatic transmission fluid) Capacity
including 4.0 US qt (3.8 ℓ) Rear 33 (225 [2.3])
Capacity Change 2.23 US qt (2.11 ℓ)
filter Wheel Size Regular 17 x 7 1/2J
■ Engine Coolant
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
1.51 US gal (5.71 ℓ)
Capacity (change including the remaining
0.19 US gal (0.71 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
■ Inverter Coolant
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
0.31 US gal (1.17 ℓ)
Capacity (change including the remaining
0.08 US gal (0.3 ℓ) in the filler tank)

Information
565
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 566 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Motor Number 1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Motor
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your Number
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and motor number are shown located under the cover.
as follows.

Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number
Cover

Motor Number

Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
Information

566
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 567 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM*
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System
Remote Transmitter
Wireless Charger *

Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not

Information
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.

* Not available on all models 567

 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 568 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.

In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.

568
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 569 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness codes, as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. 1Testing of Readiness Codes
Some States use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle's emissions The readiness codes are erased when the 12-volt
components are working properly. battery is disconnected, and set again only after
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the 12-volt several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without turning the power a later date to complete the test.
system on. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it
then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are not set. are still not set, see a dealer.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.

2. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for six hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Turn the power system on.

Information
Continued 569
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 570 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

5. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
6. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
7. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for 40 minutes.
Information

570
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 571 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Warranty Coverages

■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance

Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Information
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts

against defects in materials and workmanship.

Continued 571
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 572 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement 12-Volt Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage

for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as

long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

■ EPA Contact Information

An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Information

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

Office of Transportation and Air Quality
Compliance Division, Light-Duty Vehicle Group
Attn: Warranty Complaints
2000 Traverwood Drive
Ann Arbor, MI 48105
Email: [email protected]

572
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 573 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Authorized Manuals

■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

■ For U.S. Owners

Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1-(800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at
www.helminc.com.

■ For Canadian Owners

Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

Information
573
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 574 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals. 1Customer Service Information

When you call or write, please give us the following
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that information:
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the • Vehicle Identification Number
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Motor Number
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
P. 566
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
U.S. Owners Canadian Owners • Your name, address, and telephone number
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Canada Inc. • A detailed description of the problem
Honda Automobile Customer Services Customer Relations • Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A 180 Honda Boulevard
1919 Torrance Blvd. Markham, ON
Torrance, CA 90501-2746 L6C 0H9
Tel: (800) 999-1009 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: [email protected]

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Information

Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546

574
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 575 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Index
Index
Numbers Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 179 Error Messages........................................ 283
Sensors.................................................... 182 General Information ................................ 288
12-Volt Battery Charging System
Synchronized Mode ................................. 181 Home Screen........................................... 222
Indicator ........................................... 76, 554
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 179 Internet Radio ......................... 205, 259, 261
Air Pressure ....................................... 517, 565 iPod ........................................ 202, 252, 291
A Airbags ........................................................ 45 Limitations for Manual
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 51 Operation.............................. 232, 341, 374
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 465
After a Collision......................................... 48 MP3/WMA/AAC.............. 199, 208, 249, 262
Accessories and Modifications ................ 533
Airbag Care ............................................... 57 Playing a CD.................................... 199, 249
Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 172
Event Data Recorder .................................... 0 Recommended CDs................................. 289
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System............ 426
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 48 Recommended Devices............................ 291
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).......... 85, 429
Indicator .............................................. 55, 78 Remote Controls ..................................... 188
Additives
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ......... 56 Security Code.......................................... 187
Coolant .......................................... 500, 502
Sensors...................................................... 45 Selecting an Audio Source....................... 232
Engine Oil ............................................... 495
Side Airbags .............................................. 52 Status Area ............................................. 228
Washer ................................................... 505
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 54 Theft Protection ...................................... 187
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 495
AM/FM Radio .................................... 197, 237 USB Flash Drives ...................... 208, 262, 291
Adjusting
Android AutoTM ........................................ 278 USB Port.................................................. 185
Armrest .................................................. 166
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 465 Wallpaper Setup.............................. 193, 220
Clock ...................................................... 118
Indicator .................................................... 78 Audio/Information Screen ............... 191, 214
Front Seats.............................................. 160
Apple CarPlay®.......................................... 274 Audio/Information Touch Screen ............ 216
Head Restraints....................................... 163
Armrest ..................................................... 166 Authorized Manuals ................................ 573
Mirrors.................................................... 158
Audio Remote Controls............................ 188 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 129
Steering Wheel ....................................... 157
Audio System ............................................ 184 Customize............................... 113, 307, 330
Temperature ........................................... 103
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 195, 230 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support
AhaTM ........................................................ 261
Audio/Information Screen ................ 191, 214 System) .................................................... 147

Index
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
Audio/Information Touch Screen ............. 216 Indicator.................................................... 83
System).................................................... 179
Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 186 Automatic Intermittent Wipers............... 152
Changing the Mode................................ 179
Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout .. 219 Automatic Lighting .................................. 145
Defrosting the Windshield and
Closing Apps ........................................... 229 Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 186
Windows .............................................. 180
Display Setup................................... 196, 231 Average Fuel Economy ............................ 102
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 527

575
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 576 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Average Fuel Economy Records............... 104 Bulb Replacement .................................... 506 Child Seat for Infants ................................ 60
Average Speed.......................................... 103 Brake/Taillights, Rear Turn Signal Lights, and Child Seat for Small Children .................... 61
Rear Side Marker Lights ......................... 511 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Fog Lights ............................................... 508 Belt ......................................................... 65
B Front Side Marker Lights.......................... 509 Larger Children ......................................... 68
Battery................................................. 11, 525 Front Turn Signal Lights........................... 509 Rear-facing Child Seat............................... 60
12-Volt .................................................... 525 Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights ....... 510 Selecting a Child Seat ............................... 62
12-Volt Battery Charging System Headlights............................................... 506 Using a Tether .......................................... 67
Indicator .................................................. 76 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 513 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 128
Charging (12-Volt Battery) ....................... 525 Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 510 Cleaning the Exterior............................... 530
High Voltage ..................................... 11, 462 Rear License Plate Lights.......................... 513 Cleaning the Interior ............................... 528
Jump Starting .......................................... 548 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Climate Control System ........................... 179
Maintenance (Checking the 12-Volt Lights .................................................... 510 Changing the Mode................................ 179
Battery).................................................. 525 Taillights and Back-Up Lights ................... 512 Defrosting the Windshield and
Maintenance (Replacing the Button Bulb Specifications ................................... 564 Windows .............................................. 180
Battery).................................................. 526 Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 527
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 38 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 179
Beverage Holders...................................... 171 C Sensors ................................................... 182
Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 211, 265 Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 70 Synchronized Mode ................................ 181
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............. 340, 371 Cargo Area................................................ 176 Using Automatic Climate Control............ 179
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 69 Cargo Hook............................................... 175 Clock ......................................................... 118
Brake System............................................. 463 Carrying Cargo ................................. 411, 413 CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 465 CD Player........................................... 199, 249 SystemTM) ................................................ 467
Brake Assist System ................................. 466 Center Pocket ........................................... 170 Coat Hook ................................................ 175
Fluid ........................................................ 504 Certification Label.................................... 566 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
Foot Brake ............................................... 464 Changing Bulbs ........................................ 506 (CMBSTM) ................................................. 467
Index

Indicator ............................................ 74, 556 Child Safety................................................. 58 Compass.................................................... 406

Parking Brake .......................................... 463 Childproof Door Locks............................. 128 Console Compartment............................. 169
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ................ 74 Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 133 Controls .................................................... 117
Brake System Indicator (Red) ..................... 74 Child Seat.................................................... 58
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 153 Booster Seats ............................................ 69

576
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 577 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 500 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Remote Engine Start................................ 418
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 501 Inside..................................................... 126 Engine Coolant
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 500 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Adding to the Radiator............................ 501
Overheating............................................ 551 Outside.................................................. 122 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 500
Coolant (Inverter) .................................... 502 Lockout Prevention System ...................... 125 Overheating ............................................ 551
Cooling System......................................... 500 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 519 Engine Oil ................................................. 495
Creeping (Transmission) .......................... 421 Driving....................................................... 409 Adding.................................................... 497
Cup Holders.............................................. 171 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 429 Checking................................................. 496
Customer Service Information ................ 574 Braking.................................................... 463 Displaying Oil Life.................................... 489
Customized Features ............... 108, 295, 314 Shifting ................................................... 422 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 76, 554
Transmission............................................ 421 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 495
Turning on the Power .............................. 416 EPS (Electric Power Steering)
D Driving Position Memory System............. 155 System ............................................... 79, 556
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 150 Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 527 EV Button.................................................... 13
Dead Battery (12-Volt)............................. 548 EV Indicator ................................................ 75
Defaulting All the Settings.............. 313, 337 EV Mode Indicator ..................................... 75
Defrosting the Windshield and E Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon
Windows................................................. 180 Eco Assist® System ...................................... 16 Monoxide)................................................. 70
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 567 Eco Drive Display ........................................ 17 Expanded View Driver’s Mirror ............... 159
Dimming ECON Button............................................. 424 Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 530
Headlights .............................................. 144 Elapsed Time............................................. 102 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 159
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 158 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 496 Indicator ............................................ 79, 556
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 144 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 454 F
Display Button.................................. 191, 214 Emergency ................................................ 561 Features .................................................... 183
Door Mirrors............................................. 159 Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 133 Filters

Index
Doors ........................................................ 120 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 569 Dust and Pollen ....................................... 527
Auto Door Locking.................................. 129 Engine ....................................................... 566 Oil........................................................... 498
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 129 Coolant ................................................... 500 Flat Tire ..................................................... 536
Door and Trunk Open Message................. 37 Jump Starting .......................................... 548 Floor Mats................................................. 529
Keys........................................................ 120 Oil ........................................................... 495

577
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 578 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Fluids G Phonebook Phonetic Modification........... 389

Brake....................................................... 504 Receiving a Call............................... 365, 396
Gasoline (Fuel)
Engine Coolant........................................ 500 Receiving a Text Message........................ 367
Economy ................................................. 484
Inverter Coolant....................................... 502 Receiving a Text Message/E-mail ............. 398
Gauge....................................................... 98
Transmission............................................ 503 Ring Tone ....................................... 356, 384
Information ............................................. 482
Windshield Washer.................................. 505 Selecting a Mail Account......................... 399
Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 103
FM/AM Radio .................................... 197, 237 Speed Dial ...................................... 358, 386
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Foot Brake................................................. 464 To Create a Security PIN.......................... 354
Refueling................................................. 482
Front Airbags (SRS) ..................................... 48 To Set Up Text Message Options ............. 352
Gauges ........................................................ 98
Front Seats To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options .. 383
Glass (care)........................................ 528, 531
Adjusting................................................. 160 Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
Glove Box.................................................. 169
Front Sensor Camera ................................ 427 HD RadioTM ............................................... 237
Fuel ...................................................... 28, 482 Head Restraints ........................................ 163
Economy ................................................. 484 H Headlights ................................................ 144
Gauge ....................................................... 98 Aiming.................................................... 506
Halogen Bulbs .......................................... 506
Instant Fuel Economy............................... 103 Auto High-Beam ..................................... 147
Handling the Unexpected........................ 535
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78 Automatic Operation .............................. 145
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 340, 371
Range...................................................... 102 Dimming......................................... 144, 150
Auto Answer........................................... 355
Recommendation .................................... 482 Operating ............................................... 144
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Refueling ................................................. 482 Heaters (Seat)................................... 177, 178
Call History.................................... 357, 385
Fuel Economy............................................ 484 High Beam Indicator.................................. 81
Automatic Transferring............................ 355
Fuel Fill Cap......................................... 28, 483 High Voltage Battery ............................... 462
Displaying Messages................................ 400
Message .................................................. 555 Hill Start Assist System ............................. 420
Displaying Text Messages ........................ 368
Fuel Fill Door....................................... 28, 483 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ........... 338
HFL Buttons..................................... 340, 371
Fuses .......................................................... 558 HondaLink® .............................................. 267
HFL Menus ...................................... 342, 375
Inspecting and Changing ......................... 560 Hybrid Vehicle
Index

HFL Status Display ........................... 341, 373

Locations ......................................... 558, 559 SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi Mode
In Case of Emergency.............................. 404
Drive) ...................................................... 10
Limitations for Manual Operation .... 341, 374
Making a Call.................................. 361, 393
Options During a Call ...................... 366, 397
Phone Setup.................................... 347, 380

578
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 579 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

I Lights On................................................... 81 J
Low Fuel.................................................... 78
Identification Numbers Jump Starting ........................................... 548
Low Oil Pressure ................................ 76, 554
Engine and Motor................................... 566
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 80, 458, 460
Vehicle Identification............................... 566
Illumination Control
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 76, 555 K
Parking Brake and Brake System ........ 74, 556
Knob ...................................................... 153 Key Number Tag....................................... 121
POWER SYSTEM ........................................ 75
Immobilizer System.................................. 134 Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 125
READY ...................................................... 75
Indicator ................................................... 82 Keys ........................................................... 120
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).............. 84
Indicators.................................................... 74 Lockout Prevention.................................. 125
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 39, 77
12-Volt Battery Charging System ...... 76, 554 Number Tag ............................................ 121
Security System Alarm ............................... 82
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber) .... 85 Rear Door Won’t Open............................ 128
Shift Lever Position .................................... 77
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Remote Engine Start................................ 418
Smart Entry System.................................... 83
(Green) ........................................... 85, 430 Remote Transmitter................................. 124
SPORT Mode ..................................... 77, 425
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 78 Types and Functions ................................ 120
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 55, 78
Auto High-Beam (Green)........................... 83 Valet Key................................................. 132
System Message ........................................ 81
Brake System (Amber)............................... 74 Kickdown (Transmission) ......................... 421
Transmission.............................................. 77
Brake System (Red) ................................... 74
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 81
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ................................................ 87
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) L
System............................................. 79, 454 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)......... 447
ECON Mode ..................................... 83, 424
VSA® OFF .......................................... 79, 455
Electric Power Steering (EPS) LaneWatchTM ............................................ 456
Information............................................... 563
System ............................................ 79, 556 Language (HFL) ................................ 341, 373
Instant Fuel Economy ............................... 103
EV............................................................. 75 LATCH (Child Seats).................................... 63
Instrument Panel ........................................ 73
EV Mode................................................... 75 Lights................................................. 144, 506
Brightness Control ................................... 153
Fog Light .................................................. 81 Auto High-Beam ..................................... 147
Interior Lights ........................................... 167

Index
High Beam................................................ 81 Automatic ............................................... 145
Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 158
Immobilizer System ................................... 82 Bulb Replacement ................................... 506
Inverter Coolant ....................................... 502
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Daytime Running Lights........................... 150
iPod ................................................... 202, 252
(Amber) .................................................. 86 Fog Lights ............................................... 146
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) High Beam Indicator.................................. 81
(Green) ........................................... 86, 449 Interior .................................................... 167

579
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 580 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Light Switches ......................................... 144 Radiator .................................................. 501 Oil (Engine) .............................................. 495
Lights On Indicator .................................... 81 Remote Transmitter................................. 526 Adding ................................................... 497
Turn Signals............................................. 144 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 506 Checking ................................................ 496
Load Limits ................................................ 413 Safety...................................................... 487 Displaying Oil Life ................................... 489
Locking/Unlocking .................................... 120 Service Items ........................................... 491 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 76, 554
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 129 Tires ........................................................ 516 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 495
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 128 Transmission Fluid ................................... 503 Viscosity.................................................. 495
From Inside.............................................. 126 Under the Hood ...................................... 493 Open Source Licences .............................. 294
From Outside........................................... 122 Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 76, 555 Opening/Closing
Keys ........................................................ 120 Map Lights ................................................ 168 Hood ...................................................... 494
Using a Key ............................................. 125 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 413 Moonroof ............................................... 140
Lockout Prevention System...................... 125 Meters, Gauges........................................... 98 Power Windows...................................... 137
Low Battery Charge (12-Volt) .................. 554 Mirrors ...................................................... 158 Trunk ...................................................... 130
Low Fuel Indicator ...................................... 78 Adjusting ................................................ 158 Outside Temperature Display ................. 103
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 76, 554 Door ....................................................... 159 Overheating ............................................. 551
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Exterior ................................................... 159
Strength................................................... 121 Interior Rearview ..................................... 158
Lower Anchors ............................................ 63 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 533
P
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit).............. 413 Moonroof ................................................. 140 Pandora® .......................................... 207, 259
Motor Number ......................................... 566 Panic Mode............................................... 136
MP3 ................................... 199, 208, 249, 262 Parking ..................................................... 475
M Multi-Information Display ....................... 100 Parking Brake........................................... 463
Maintenance ............................................. 485 Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 480 Parking Brake and Brake System
12-Volt Battery ........................................ 525 Indicator ........................................... 74, 556
Brake Fluid............................................... 504 Parking Sensor System ............................. 476
Cleaning.................................................. 528 N Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator....... 56
Index

Climate Control System ........................... 527 Numbers (Identification).......................... 566 Passing Indicators..................................... 144
Coolant ........................................... 500, 502 Playing Bluetooth® Audio ............... 211, 265
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 489 POWER Button ......................................... 141
Oil ........................................................... 496
O Power System
Precautions.............................................. 486 Odometer ................................................. 102 Turning on.............................................. 416

580
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 581 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

POWER SYSTEM Indicator ......................... 75 Bulbs ....................................................... 506 Security System......................................... 134
Power Windows ....................................... 137 Fuses ............................................... 558, 559 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 82
POWER/CHARGE Gauge ............................ 99 Tires ........................................................ 522 Security System Alarm Indicator................. 82
Precautions While Driving Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 514 SEL/RESET Button ..................................... 101
Rain ........................................................ 421 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 568 Selecting a Child Seat................................. 62
Pregnant Women....................................... 43 Resetting a Trip Meter ............................. 102 Selector Knob (Audio).............................. 190
Puncture (Tire) ......................................... 536 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).......... 443 Shift Lever........................................... 27, 422
Indicator .................................................... 84 Operation.......................................... 27, 423
On and Off .............................................. 444 Releasing................................................. 550
R Won’t Move............................................ 550
Radiator.................................................... 501 Shift Lever Position Indicator ............ 77, 423
Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 197, 237 S Shift Lever Positions ................................. 422
Radio (SiriusXM®)..................................... 241 Safe Driving ................................................ 33 Shifting (Transmission)............................. 422
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 198, 240 Safety Check ............................................... 37 Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 42
Range........................................................ 102 Safety Labels ............................................... 71 Side Airbags................................................ 52
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 198, 240 Safety Message ............................................. 1 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 54
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ...... 569 Seat Belts..................................................... 38 Siri® Eyes Free ........................................... 282
READY Indicator ........................................ 75 Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor .................. 42 SiriusXM® Radio........................................ 241
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 40 Smart Entry Remote ................................. 418
Button..................................................... 154 Checking ................................................... 44 Smart Entry with Push Button Start
Rear Seat Heaters..................................... 178 Fastening................................................... 41 System ..................................................... 122
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 158 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Snow Tires................................................. 524
Refueling .................................................. 482 Belt.......................................................... 65 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) .............................. 255
Fuel Gauge ............................................... 98 Pregnant Women ...................................... 43 Spark Plugs ............................................... 564
Gasoline ......................................... 482, 564 Reminder................................................... 39 Specifications............................................ 564
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 78 Warning Indicator................................ 39, 77 Specified Fuel ................................... 482, 564

Index
Regulations .............................. 460, 519, 567 Seat Heaters...................................... 177, 178 Speedometer .............................................. 98
Remote Engine Start................................ 418 Seats .......................................................... 160 SPORT Mode ............................................. 425
Remote Transmitter................................. 124 Adjusting................................................. 160 SPORT Mode Indicator ....................... 77, 425
Replacement Front Seats .............................................. 160 SRS Airbags (Airbags)................................. 48
Battery.................................................... 526 Seat Heaters .................................... 177, 178

581
 17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 582 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Steering Wheel Tire Repair Kit.......................................... 537 Light Bulb ............................................... 564
Adjusting................................................. 157 Wear Indicators ....................................... 521 Main Switch............................................ 132
Stopping.................................................... 475 Winter..................................................... 524 Turn Signals.............................................. 144
Summer Tires ............................................ 524 Towing a Trailer ....................................... 415 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 81
Sunglasses Holder ..................................... 176 Towing Your Vehicle................................ 415 Turn-by-Turn Directions .......................... 103
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........ 48 Emergency .............................................. 561 Turning on the Power ............................. 416
Switches (Around the Steering TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Does Not Activate ................................... 545
Wheel) ............................................. 4, 5, 141 System) .................................................... 458 Jump Starting ......................................... 548
SYNC Mode ............................................... 181 Indicator............................................ 80, 557 Remote Engine Start ............................... 418
System Message Indicator .......................... 81 Transmission ..................................... 421, 422
Creeping ................................................. 421
Fluid........................................................ 503
U
T Kickdown................................................ 421 Unlocking the Doors................................ 122
Temperature Operating the Shift Lever......................... 423 Unlocking the Front Doors from the
Outside Temperature Display ................... 103 Shift Lever Position Indicator.............. 77, 423 Inside......................................................... 21
Temperature Sensor ......................... 103, 182 Shifting ................................................... 422 USB Flash Drives ....................... 208, 262, 291
Time (Adjusting) ....................................... 118 Trip Meter................................................. 102 USB Port.................................................... 185
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Troubleshooting....................................... 535 Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start
(TPMS)...................................................... 458 Blown Fuse...................................... 558, 559 System..................................................... 122
Indicator ............................................ 80, 557 Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 31
Tire Repair Kit ........................................... 537 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 32
Tires ........................................................... 516 Emergency Towing.................................. 561
V
Air Pressure ..................................... 517, 565 Noise When Braking.................................. 32 Valet Key .................................................. 132
Checking and Maintaining....................... 516 Overheating ............................................ 551 Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 7
Inspection................................................ 516 Power System Won’t Start....................... 545 Vehicle Identification Number ................ 566
Labeling................................................... 517 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 536 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) ................. 454
Index

Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 536 Rear Door Won’t Open...................... 31, 128 OFF Button ............................................. 455
Regulations.............................................. 519 Shift Lever Won’t Move........................... 550 Off Indicator ............................................. 79
Rotation .................................................. 523 Warning Indicators .................................... 74 System Indicator ....................................... 79
Summer................................................... 524 Trunk......................................................... 130 Ventilation ............................................... 179
Tire Chains .............................................. 524 Lid........................................................... 130 Viscosity (Oil).................................... 495, 565

582
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 583 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分

Voice Control Operation ......................... 233 Wiper Blades ........................................... 514

Audio Commands................................... 235 Wipers and Washers ................................ 151
Climate Control Commands.................... 236 Winter Tires
General Commands ................................ 236 Snow Tires............................................... 524
Music Search Commands........................ 236 Tire Chains .............................................. 524
On Screen Commands ............................ 236 Wipers and Washers ................................. 151
Phone Commands .................................. 235 Automatic Intermittent Wipers................. 152
Useful Commands .................................. 235 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 514
Voice Portal Screen ................................. 234 Wireless Charger....................................... 173
Voice Recognition ................................... 233 WMA ................................. 199, 208, 249, 262
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) ................. 454 Worn Tires................................................. 516

W
Wallpaper......................................... 193, 220
Warning and Information Messages ........ 88
Warning Indicator On/Blinking............... 554
Warning Labels .......................................... 71
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 571
Watts ........................................................ 564
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 521
Wi-Fi Connection ..................................... 272
Window Washers ..................................... 151
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 505
Switch .................................................... 151

Index
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 137
Windshield ............................................... 151
Cleaning ......................................... 528, 531
Defrosting/Defogging ............................. 180
Washer Fluid........................................... 505

583
17 ACCORD FHEV-31T3W6200.book 584 ページ ２０１６年４月１１日 月曜日 午後２時４０分